JP2021048935A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing a game includes performance execution means. The performance execution means can execute a change performance that changes display modes of prescribed display in a first situation, a special performance that notifies a first content advantageous to a player in accordance with a display mode of the prescribed display becoming a specific mode, and a prescribed performance notifying a second content advantageous to the player that is different from the first content by changing display modes of specific display different from the prescribed display in a second situation different from the first situation. A specific performance in which at least a part of performance modes is common when the change performance is executed and when the prescribed performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13-3

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that changes the meter after the character moves, and the degree of change of the meter after the character moves differs depending on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed before the character moves. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2018-7755

However, the interest of the game was insufficient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), and the effect can be executed. A means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) is provided, and the effect execution means has a predetermined display (for example, a meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, a background image, an active display, etc.) in a first situation (for example, during reach fluctuation, etc.). ) Is changed (for example, the meter effect shown in FIGS. 13-8, the background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), etc. ) And the display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image is changed to red, the active display is changed to red, etc.). A special effect that informs the first content (for example, development to super reach) that is advantageous for the player, and a second situation that is different from the first situation (for example, a small hit prize in the small hit RUSH, a big hit gaming state). In the interval period, etc.), the display mode of the specific display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) different from the predetermined display is changed (for example, the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize is added and rounded. The second content (for example, the total number of prize balls (or the increase in the total number of prize balls), the progress to the next round, etc.) that is advantageous for the player different from the first content by adding 1 to the number, etc.) Predetermined effects to be notified (for example, total prize ball number update effect by total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9 and the like, round number display update effect by 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16 and the like). It is feasible, and there are at least a part of the effect modes when the change effect (for example, meter effect) is executed and when the predetermined effect (for example, total prize ball number update effect) is executed. (For example, the accessory effect for operating the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIGS. 13-8 (B) and 13-9 (B)) was executed, and a character image was added. A moving image effect executing means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100) capable of executing a moving image effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) for displaying a moving image and data related to the moving image are stored. A first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) and a second storage area for storing data related to character images (for example, notation). Storage area 91AKM13, etc.), moving image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) that controls the display of moving images using the data in the first storage area, and data in the second storage area. A character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) for controlling the display of a character image by using the second storage area data is provided by a first component (for example, text image designation information). The character image control means includes data on a plurality of character image components including a designated text image and the like and a second component (for example, a display style set by the text display setting information), and the character image control means is 1. The first component and the second component can be changed during the display period of the character image added to the moving image (see, for example, FIG. 19-7).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, appropriate display control becomes possible.

(2) The gaming machine of the above (1) has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state, etc.), and the special state. A state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a game state is provided in a special state (for example, a second KT state) that is easily controlled by the state. The second situation is that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state (for example, a small hit prize in a small hit RUSH, etc.), and the effect executing means. As the predetermined effect, the specific display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, etc.) corresponds to the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state. The second content (for example, the total number of prize balls) may be notified by changing the display mode of the above (for example, adding the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the gaming machine which can control the advantageous state which is advantageous for the player, the special state different from the advantageous state, and the special state which is easily controlled by the special state. ..

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the specific effect may be an effect of operating a movable body for the effect (for example, a movable body 026SH32 or the like).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by using the movable body for the production.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above, the effect executing means can execute an effect effect that enhances the effect of the specific effect in response to the execution of the specific effect. The effect effect executed in response to the execution of the specific effect in the first situation and the effect effect executed in response to the execution of the specific effect in the second situation have different production modes. It may be common. As described above, for example, in FIG. 13-9 (C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8 (B) may be displayed instead of the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above, the effect executing means can execute an effect effect that enhances the effect of the specific effect in response to the execution of the specific effect. The effect effect executed in response to the execution of the specific effect in the first situation and the effect effect executed in response to the execution of the specific effect in the second situation are the effects modes. At least part of it may be different. For example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8 (B) and the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF of FIG. 13-9 (C) are different from each other in at least a part of the effect mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

(6) Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), and is an effect executing means (for example, an effect) capable of performing an effect. The effect executing means includes a control CPU 120, etc.), and the effect executing means changes a display mode of a predetermined display (for example, a meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, a background image, an active display, etc.) (for example, FIG. 13-8, etc.). The meter effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), the background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), and the display mode of the predetermined display are specific modes (for example, meter value). Is "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), and the first content that is advantageous for the player (for example, development to super reach, etc.) Change the display mode of the special effect to be notified and the specific display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) different from the predetermined display (for example, the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize is added, round A predetermined effect of notifying a second content (for example, a small hit prize during a small hit RUSH, an interval period of a big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous for a player different from the first content by adding 1 to the number, etc.) (For example, the total prize ball number update effect by the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9 and the like, the round number display update effect by 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16 and the like) can be executed. , The specific effect in which at least a part of the effect modes are common when the change effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) is executed and when the predetermined effect (for example, total prize ball number update effect, etc.) is executed. It is characterized in that the effect (for example, the accessory effect for operating the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIGS. 13-8 (B) and 13-9 (B)) is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

(7) Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect in response to the execution of a specific effect. Etc.), and the change effect is shown in the first change effect (for example, FIG. 13-8, etc.) that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, the background image, the active display, etc.). The meter effect, the background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), and the specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, the total number of prize balls display). In the second change effect (for example, the total prize ball number update effect by the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9 and the like, FIG. 13-16, etc.) that changes the display mode of the display mode of 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc. The display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)" by executing the first change effect, including the round number display update effect by the 026SH32EF02 shown. ) ”, The background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), and a special effect is provided to notify the player of the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development into super reach). The second content (for example, the total number of prize balls (or the total number of prize balls)) that is advantageous for the player different from the first content by changing the display mode of the specific display by executing the second change effect. It is characterized by notifying (increase in the number of prize balls), progress to the next round, etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following gaming machines (8) to (15). Conventionally, there has been a technique in a game machine that enables character information of character lines to be displayed in different modes during execution of a super reach effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77592. In such a game machine, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, the control load for displaying the moving image increases, or the recognition of the character image becomes difficult. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of appropriately controlling the display.

The game machine (8) is a game machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko game machine 1), and is a moving image effect (for example, SP reach A or SP reach B) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added. A moving image effect executing means (for example, a microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control) capable of executing the reach effect of the image, a first storage area for storing data related to the moving image (for example, a storage area 91AKM11), and data related to a character image. A second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13, etc.) for storing the data, and a moving image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) for controlling the display of moving images using the data in the first storage area. A character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of a character image using the data in the second storage area is provided, and the data in the second storage area is the first configuration. The data including a plurality of character image components including an element (for example, a text image specified by the text image designation information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by the text display setting information) is included. The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to the moving image (see, for example, FIG. 19-7).
With such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

(9) In the game machine of the above (8), when the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period, the character image control means displays the second component related to the character image. It may be modifiable (see, eg, FIG. 19-8).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

(10) In the game machine according to (8) or (9), the character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image (for example, field data constituting a color field). The second component relating to the character image may be modifiable (see, eg, FIG. 19-6).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

(11) In any of the game machines (8) to (10), the character image control means is a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group (for example, a text image showing "super hot" or the like. ) Can be displayed, and the second component related to the specific character image may be changed at a plurality of timings (see, for example, FIG. 19-8).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

(12) In any of the game machines (8) to (11), the character image control means can individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. It may be (see, for example, Figure 19-4).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

(13) In any of the game machines (8) to (12), the data in the second storage area may include outline data (for example, outline font data) that can be used for displaying a character image.
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

(14) In any of the game machines (8) to (13) above, when a specific element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "gold"), a character having glossiness. In addition to displaying the image, an effect image may be added around the character image and displayed (see, for example, FIG. 19-8).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

(15) In any of the game machines (8) to (14) above, when a special element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "rainbow"), a predetermined range (for example, a character) is set. It is possible to display a character image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed (for example, changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, reddish purple, etc.) depending on the internal coordinates, display time range, etc.). You may.
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in the feature part 052IW. FIG. 5 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 052IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the accessory control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table at the time of over winning. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of a small hit prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of a small hit prize. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number emphasizing production determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the game state and the transition of an effect mode after a big hit game which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode setting process which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display correspondence display control processing which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the initial color determination table and the final color determination table of the variable display correspondence display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution processing which the effect control CPU 120 performs when it is controlled to a small hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution processing which the effect control CPU 120 performs when it is controlled to a small hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination table of various suggestion effects. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect execution processing of the variable display correspondence display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen in a small hit RUSH mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect which changes the display mode of the hold display in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the Gase effect of the effect which changes the display mode of the hold display in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting value suggestion effect in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the probability change suggestion effect in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the game state and the transition of an effect mode after a big hit game in a feature part 022SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the jackpot type determination table of the feature part 022SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus rush icon control processing at the start of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus rush icon control processing during a round game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus rush icon control processing of an ending period. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the production screen of a normal mode → small hit RUSH mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the production screen of a small hit RUSH mode → Chan time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen when the small hit RUSH mode continues. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus rush icon control processing in a variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the bonus rush icon display change determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen at the time of changing the display mode of a bonus rush icon during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen which concerns on modification 1 when changing the display mode of a bonus rush icon. It is explanatory drawing explaining the structure of a part of the game board 2 of the game machine which concerns on a feature part 026SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the meter effect executed in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 026SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 026SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the meter production and the like. It is explanatory drawing explaining the meter production and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 026SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 026SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 026SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. It is explanatory drawing explaining the background effect and the like. It is explanatory drawing explaining the active display effect and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 026SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 026SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 026SH. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation effect determination processing which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the presence / absence and the number of times of operation effect which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the setting suggestion number of times which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the setting suggestion pattern which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the setting suggestion pattern which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the value notification number of times which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various productions concerning a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the operation effect which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the operation effect which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control board which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the storage area which concerns on the characteristic part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the moving image data and a text display process table which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display process table which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display control example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled to close the large winning opening, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays the role of both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". .. In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, movement of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probabilistic symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning prize determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the effect control board 12 is transmitted to send the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes the process of deciding which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol fluctuation processing is completed. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as operation is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and allows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various prize information related to winning is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, and is used as a game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 on each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, at the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and decorations. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and at least RAM is built in. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the glass door frame 3a and a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with the same are connected, and various abnormalities are obtained based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Outputs a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are performed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and sends a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), and FIG. 9-. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 5 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, 6 numbers of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and 6 levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame / door frame open. The sensor 21TM300 outputs to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. , The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). The set value is changed and / on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070) in step S21TM4030). Or it can be confirmed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode), provided that the setting value is changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is in the open state. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of the setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the data check in the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), and in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state. (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 has performed a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing in steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to be in a state where the set value can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed when it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermined the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and moves to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, the current set value can be displayed (step S21TM4550) and the security signal can be output (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and which does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process when the normal game processing is started. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are performed. Corresponding to the end of the control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the game machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a security signal is set to a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. When 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and if the setting change mode is controlled, 30 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, information output process), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clear is performed). When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal will be continued until becomes. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or is controlled to the setting change mode by executing the initialization process. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

A security signal is also output when an error for which the game is stopped, such as a magnetic abnormality, is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, if the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power off occurs). Sometimes it is unclear whether or not an error has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (value stored in the set value storage area) on the effect control CPU 120 side is used as it is as an image. If the display is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9 are restored from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clearing has not been performed) can be notified.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it suffices to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that the value has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the setting change mode is in progress. This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The initial value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds, which corresponds to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is one round (taking the random number for normal symbol hit judgment). When the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value), the initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but not limited to this form, the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). You may move to the process when the power is cut off and restored.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be started.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in a state where the set value is unstable, and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the disconnection occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the game machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (iii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If the setting change mode is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the state of the game machine even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is displayed. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i) is satisfied. )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the production control CPU 120 that received this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite the fact that there is no such operation, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period during which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not it is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. The state of the game machine when the power is cut off during the change can be appropriately determined.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF. (Step S21TM461-10 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) common, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is urged to be turned ON when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value error error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to ensure that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the set value "0" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the set value storage area. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored at the time of power restoration. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may be set. In this case, the clerk at the game hall ends the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the game machine may be shifted to the normal game processing, the workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power switch 21TM055 is turned off and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and 9-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is displayed. , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 9-12. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the set value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, the setting is controlled even when the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed). If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It will be a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode can be appropriately set. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set value (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to a game machine (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine that outputs a "big hit signal" or the like from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for an external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-500206 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the control state related to the setting to the outside of the game machine.

The gaming machine of means O1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting value can be confirmed with the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can be controlled in a setting confirmation mode, and control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. A specific signal output means that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) and a value related to a period during which the specific signal is output (security signal timer). A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value) is provided, and the setting means is controlled in a case where the setting change mode is controlled and a setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set a predetermined value common to the above cases (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), and the specific signal output means is either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Corresponding to the end of control, a specific signal is output until at least the period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (when the setting confirmation mode ends, the security signal continues until one second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode. The security signal is continuously output when the setting change mode ends and 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode). According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of the means O2 is the gaming machine of the means O1, and the RAM is cleared based on the initialization means for initializing the gaming state (step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150 in which the RAM clear flag is set (step S21TM1410). The game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the initialization means initializes the game state according to the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting change mode). After the RAM clear is executed later), the setting means sets the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), and then the period corresponding to the predetermined value. A specific value corresponding to a long period can be set (when RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465), and the specific signal output means changes the setting. Corresponding to the end of mode control, a specific signal is output until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses (the security signal is continued until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode due to the end of the setting change mode. And output). According to this, in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value, and the setting is changed. When controlled to a mode, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting means is standardized and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of the means O3 is a gaming machine of the means O1 or the means O2, and in the setting changing mode, a specific operation for ending the setting changing mode (the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680). When the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing detection), the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change mode) for storing the specific information (setting changing flag) has been entered. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, which sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4580 and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode, and supplies power to the game machine. When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the game is stopped. It is also possible to output a specific signal (the process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied). And. According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of the means O4 is any game machine selected from the means O1 to the means O3, and is a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process). The game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and the setting change mode control means (steps S21TM4530 to step S21TM4530). The game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of S21TM4620) and the operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680 without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode in the setting change mode. Is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode in the backup area of the RAM 102, which stores the specific information when the power supply to the game machine is stopped. A game control microcomputer 100) that sets the changing flag and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode, and power supply to the game machine is started. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the display means notifies an error. Is possible to send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210. In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value ("returns the power supply after the power is turned off" to the image display device 5. It is characterized by displaying the message "Please turn on and shift to the setting change mode"). According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and the setting change mode. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as controlled (setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step is based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped ( The value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (power recovery). When it is determined in step S21TM4030 of the time that the setting changing flag is set), an error notification means capable of executing error notification (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, an error occurs in step S21TM4210). A game control microcomputer 100) for displaying is further provided. According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of the means P2 is the game machine of the means P1, and the setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (the game machine frame 3 is in the open state when the power is turned on). , The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), the setting change mode can be controlled, and the power supply to the game machine is started. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the setting change condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (based on the fact that when the power is turned on, it is determined as YES in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140). It shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220). According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and the setting value is appropriately set while avoiding unnecessary error notification. You can encourage changes.

The game machine of the means P3 is a game machine of the means P1 or the means P2, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (power supply). When it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of recovery that the setting changing flag is set), the error notification can be executed and the game can be stopped (when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered. If the transition condition is not satisfied (when NO is determined in any of step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode). It is characterized by that. According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of the means P4 is any game machine selected from the means P1 to the means P3, and is a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process). 100), an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the execution of the effect, and the game control means include a display means (display monitor 21TM029).
When the setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and the specific information storage means are provided, and power supply to the game machine is started. When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the display means executes the error notification. At the same time, it is possible to send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command can be sent in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210. The effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value in response to receiving the error command (the power is turned on again after the power is turned off). The message "Please move to the setting change mode" is displayed). According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and the setting change mode. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as controlled (setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step is based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped ( The value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. When it is set (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state). Regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state is satisfied. , Automatically control to the setting change mode). According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state. The RAM is set based on the initialization means (for example, step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) in which the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The game machine of the means Q2 is the game machine of the means Q1, and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. If not, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the frame for the gaming machine is used. 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the ON state, the RAM after the setting change mode ends. (Clearing is executed), the setting change mode is set based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. Controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (when the setting change flag is set at the time of power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode is set. Regardless of whether or not the conditions for transition are satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled). According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of the means Q3 is a game machine of the means Q1 or the means Q2, and the setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (the setting is being changed when the power is turned on). When the flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (clear switch (setting). Changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends), the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and the setting change mode is set. It is possible to control, and the setting change mode is terminated based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off). The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started). The specific information is deleted when the setting change mode ends based on the specific operation (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends), and the setting change. The mode control means is the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. (If the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), it is automatically controlled regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Control to the setting change mode) and end the setting change mode based on the specific operation (end the setting change mode based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). It is characterized by. According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of the means Q4 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value for storing a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). It is provided with a storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored), and can execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.). Yes, the set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed), and the setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (). The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680), and the setting value storage means performs the specific operation when controlled to the setting change mode. When the power supply to the game machine is stopped without being performed, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode is continuously stored (the setting value storage area is the backup area of the RAM 102). If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area will be changed. Even if the power is cut off, the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained). According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value for storing a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). It is provided with a storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored), and can execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.). Yes, the setting change mode control means stores the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is used. (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the set value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. At the same time, the setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area. (The setting value storage means is set to the game machine without performing the specific operation when the setting value storage means is controlled to the setting change mode). When the power supply is stopped, the set value before the change operation is performed in the setting change mode is stored (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the lock switch is used. Unless the 21TM051 is switched to OFF, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is not changed. Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is used. It is characterized by being retained). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

(Explanation of feature part 052IW)
Next, the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 052IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is high (however, it will be described later). (Except in the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 052IW is configured so that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 052IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the bottom surface member 052IW108 is provided in the jackpot game state. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball winning in the large winning opening is further guided to the guidance path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guidance path 052IW100 is further branched into two paths 052IW102,103, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 052IW100 is guided to the left side path 052IW102 or the right side path 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 052IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left side path 052IW102, and when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, a game guided to the guidance path 052IW100. The ball can enter the left path 052IW102 and enter the V region 052IW104. Further, when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 052IW100 enters the right path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature unit 052IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, and on condition that it is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, after the end of the big hit game. It is controlled to a probabilistic state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error is made, and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes some time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 052IW104 and the discharge region 052IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the error may be determined as a large winning opening / exit mismatch error.

(Structure of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 052IW. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch (first count switch). In addition to the detection signals from the 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the prize-winning door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, transmission is performed to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. May be configured so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched by making the set values "1" to "6" different.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-4. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability changing state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "62986/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. By making the set values "1" to "6" different, the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 10). As shown in -3 and FIG. 10-4, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to loss). For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIG. 10-3 (A), (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of losing is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of game machine having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "10R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", the variation display is performed. There is a 9% chance that it will be a "10R probability variation jackpot", a 56% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, a "6R probability variation jackpot" with a 50% probability, a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 35% probability. 2R normal jackpot "is determined.

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 052IW, when "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game. The large winning openings are controlled to be open until a fixed number of game balls (10 in this example) are won, and a maximum of 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" or "small hit B" based on the random number for determining the hit type. , Or a table referenced to determine either "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", the variation display is performed. It is determined as "small hit A" with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, and is determined to be "small hit C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect a game ball to win a special prize inside. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 10-14), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

(Variation pattern table)
10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature portion 052IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), it is shown in FIG. 10-7 (B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol shown for KT is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By lowering the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In the feature unit 052IW, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than in the normal state.

In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 052IW, as already described, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 10-8 (Fig. 10-8). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be either. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # It may be determined to be 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of range, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided.

In the feature unit 052IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 16 is determined with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when a big hit is made in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 052IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second start winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed, the high shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is executed. Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are out of order The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation or later in the high probability / first KT state is out of range, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed with a high probability in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using FIG. 10-11 (1), a special variable winning ball when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "probability variation jackpot"). The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball to the jackpot is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V. The area opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 It is a period from when the closed state is controlled again until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal jackpot”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the winning of the first game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V. The region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state for an extremely short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), special The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is after an extremely short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and is easily controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 10-12 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Further, FIG. 10-14 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. Further, FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12 (2) shows. 10-14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the missing symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A, it is in a state where it can be won. , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. is there. Therefore, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Compared with the first KT state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is more likely to win the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for 0.2 seconds, which is extremely short, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is used. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on which of the small hits A to C is the small hit type. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize to some extent, and various modes can be considered. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three types of small hits A to C is shown, but the case is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of small hit types are configured to be provided. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol variation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the feature unit 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 052IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, and FIG. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-. The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that is opened for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in the feature unit 052IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 052IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 has ended. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) that specifies that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 10-15 and 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the first random number buffer area of (step 052IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 052IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / first KT, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 052IWS59A, at the time of starting prize Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS65A). Step 052IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 052IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature unit 052IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / 1st KT state) and 50 times of variation display is executed. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS74A or the process of step 052IWS74B described later, the high base state is caused by the start of fluctuation of either the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol. When the final fluctuation of (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends. , Or the other special symbol variation display (in this example, the 51st variation display) is reset, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation shortening state is completed. Is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 052IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (FIG. 10-7). (See FIG. 10-9), a small hit is likely to occur, so that the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is used (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 052IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmission is performed (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1123A). Step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127A). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 052IWS1125A) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126A), either the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed. When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127A, N in step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 sends the first compulsory symbol to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120A, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. Even if there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performs the right-handed operation. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but the 50th variation display is displayed by executing the processes of steps 052IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is terminated to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processes of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B are executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed display 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot starts (step 052IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or the launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or the launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first holding memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. Further, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected.

In this feature unit 052IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 052IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 052IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 052IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS65B). Step 052IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 052IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8 (D). Select, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), and if it is the 50th variation, select the second variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the decision result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) Is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1123B). Step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127B). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS1128B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 052IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126B), the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and When the variation display of the second special symbol that is neither a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 is the effect control CPU 120. The second forced symbol confirmation designation command is controlled to be transmitted to (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol is executed. Based on the fact that the variation display of the symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120B, the processing of steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 052IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss or a small hit, is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the game area. In a gaming machine configured to provide a starting winning opening, which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via a time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 052IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. The process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 052IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 052IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time reduction flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 052IWS2504).

In this feature unit 052IW, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the game is played at the passing gate 41. The game is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 has a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening. The value of the counter is added by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the big winning door. It is stopped and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-processing after opening the jackpot (step 052IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. A value is set (step 052IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the probability change flag, and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (high) Probability / second KT state) will be controlled.

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2209). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), and further sets the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, the high base number counter is not set only by setting the high base flag. In this case, since the high base count counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 052IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets the special figure time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed display 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (steps 052IWS2023B to S2025B). (See), the processing of steps 052IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right-handed display 26 is turned on at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW. First, in the feature unit 052IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the big hit game. The first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature portion 052IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 10-29 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal symbol process processing)
Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passing process (step 052IWS5113).

When the process of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113 is executed in the feature unit 052IW and the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passing process of step 052IWS5113 is executed regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when it is not in the gate passage waiting state, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is normally used as a gate for both the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the normal starting area is performed after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the operating region is performed. The detection process is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch pass processing (step 052IWS5113): In the CPU 103, the count value (gate pass memory number) of the gate pass memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the pass gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, " 4 ”) is confirmed. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): When the CPU 103 is in a state where it can start the fluctuation of the normal symbol (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 20 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gates is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 052IWS5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operation time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal design normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step 052IWS5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing memory number = 1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol), and determines whether or not to hit a normal symbol. (Step 052IWS5127). In this feature unit 052IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided that it will be a normal symbol with a probability.

In step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of the range), the CPU 103 sets the out-of-order symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5131 in step 052IWS5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5132 in step 052IWS5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step 052IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3706). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory opening pretreatment)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , That is, in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3805). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this feature unit 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the feature unit 052IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times the 6B is opened may be set to 1 time, whereas the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened may be set to 2 times in the first KT state). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to facilitate starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above and the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 052IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 052IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 052IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, the right-handed display of the white display color is normally started, but when it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, the set value "1" is set. If is, the right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and if the setting value is "2", the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , When the setting value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the right of the orange display color is relatively high. When the setting value is "5", the right-handed display of the red display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "6", the right-handed display is started at a relatively high rate. Right-handed display of the rainbow-colored display color may be started.

Further, for example, the right-handed display is configured to be continuously executed even during the KT state after the jackpot game ends, and the right-handed display display mode (for example, display color) is changed and set at the timing of the jackpot game end. It may be configured to perform a value suggestion effect.

Further, for example, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is finished in the low probability / first KT state and the state shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the left-handed display is configured to start, and the left-handed display is started. The display mode (for example, the display color) of the display may be changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. When the control of the game state is switched in some form in this way, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command in which the large winning opening is open (step 052IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 is the number of winnings for counting the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening during the round of the big hit game. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the big winning opening opening flag that specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (the round period during the big hit game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening opening display command (timing to start the round), which is extremely rare. Even if an over-winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the large winning opening (step 052IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is an interval period after opening the large winning opening. (Step 052IWS637).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / non-KT background specification command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the blue background image) (step 052IWS643). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 052IWS644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball count counter is set, the value of the prize ball counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball wins in the big winning opening during a big hit game (except during a big hit game based on a 2R probability variable big hit or a 2R normal big hit), or a game is played in a special winning opening during a high probability / second KT state. When a ball wins a prize, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660 and S667), but the game state is low probability / due to the processing of step 052IWS645 being executed. The value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0 when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed after the high base state (low probability / first KT state) is reached and the low probability / low base state is reached.

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the green background image) (step 052IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 052IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the yellow background image) (step 052IWS651). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the red background image) (step 052IWS655). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 052IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a big prize opening prize designation command (step 052IWS658), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a big hit game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is in progress. (Step 052IWS659). Whether or not a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot is in progress is determined by, for example, whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is during the jackpot effect process (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). ), And also check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 2 specified command to the display result 4 specified command. It can be judged by.

During a big hit game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state.

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS658 to S661, in this example, the prize ball is based on the fact that a prize is generated in the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot. The value of the number counter and the number of prize balls display are updated. On the other hand, even during the big hit game, if a prize is made to the big prize opening during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated and the prize ball is not updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS662). It should be noted that the "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). In addition, in the "Prize ball number display suggestion effect", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is predetermined. It is an effect that is executed at the timing when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS664). In addition, in the "Prize ball number emphasis production", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is a predetermined number. (In this example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces, 4000 pieces, 5000 pieces) is highlighted.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability / second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS667). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS665-S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball are based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special winning opening. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, only the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small hit winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS669). It should be noted that the "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special winning opening, and suggests the currently set value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 052IWS663 and executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process (step 052IWS664).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 052IWS670). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS611.

(Suggestion production processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS662) at the time of over winning. In the over-winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, and the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined (step 052IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of over winning. As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggestion effect, over-winning suggestion effect A, over-winning suggestion effect B, over-winning suggestion effect C, and over-winning. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect D, the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning, and the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the game ball wins in the large winning opening, the winning display (in this example, “+15”) is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-39, when the "over-winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound B different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound C different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound D different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over-winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. In step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of over winning are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F, is determined. 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, 45% when the set value is "2", 50% when the set value is "3", and the set value. When it is "4", it is 55%, when it is the set value "5", it is 60%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 65%. As described above, in this example, since the over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high as compared with the small hit-winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS305). .. For example, if it is determined to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over-winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052IWS302), or when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 052IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. In the normal display color (white in this example), the winning display is controlled to be displayed (step 052IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestion production processing at the time of small hit prize)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS669) at the time of winning a small hit. In the small hit winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion effect. This is performed, and the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined (step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of winning a small hit. As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect A, small hit winning suggestion effect B, and small hit winning suggestion effect. Judgment values are assigned to C, the small hit winning suggestion effect D, the small hit winning suggestion effect E, and the small hit winning suggestion effect F, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the game ball wins in the special winning opening, the winning display (in this example, "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker is displayed. A winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the sound B different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the sound D different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. .. In step 052IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A to F, which is the sum of the small hit winning suggestion effects A to F. Is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the set value is "2", 7% when the set value is "3", and the set value "4". When it is, it is 8%, when it is the set value "5", it is 9%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 10%. As described above, in this example, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is relatively low as compared with the over-winning suggestion effect already described.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step). 052IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning (N in step 052IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Step 052IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of the set value suggestion may be different depending on whether the suggestion effect at the time of over winning is executed or the suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6", whereas it is a small hit. If the suggestion effect F at the time of winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined. On the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, if the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect make the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) different from the usual one, and output a winning sound different from the usual one. The case where it is executed by the aspect is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, by setting only one of the winning display display mode (display color in this example) and the winning sound to be different from the normal mode, the over winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect are executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over-winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, a suggestion effect at the time of over-winning or a small hit winning is achieved. It may be configured to perform a time suggestion effect.

(Prize ball number display suggestion production processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 first (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS341, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 052IWS342). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and draws a lot based on random numbers. The process is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first (N in step 052IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N). Step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS344, for effect control. If the value of the prize ball counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 052IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect B. (Step 052IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, a character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N in step 052IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N). Step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS347, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 052IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N). Step 052IWS350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 052IWS351). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect D. (Step 052IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N in step 052IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N). Step 052IWS353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS353, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 052IWS354). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect E. (Step 052IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N in step 052IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first (N). Step 052IWS356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS356, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2670 or 2675. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS357). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. Determine (step 052IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, a character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, S358 (step 052IWS359). If the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS360). For example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, the set value "5" or more is confirmed, and the set value " 6 ”The accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set values is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH).
) Looking at the prize ball number display suggestion effects D to F executed during the middle period, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is 5% as the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases. While it is decreasing to 3, 3% and 2%, the accuracy of setting value "4" or more is confirmed, setting value "5" or more is confirmed, and setting value "6" is confirmed and suggestion of setting value is increasing. ..

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the set value may decrease.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the small hit RUSH period. Although the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is different between the effects D to F, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is not limited to such a mode, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed with the same execution probability. You may.

(Prize ball number emphasis production processing)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasis effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches the threshold value for each 1000 (1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000 in this example). (Step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS371, the effect is controlled. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches the threshold value for every 1000 first, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number emphasis effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasis effect, and is a random number. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not the prize ball number emphasizing effect is present (step 052IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-45, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 1000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "1000 OVER".

In this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, not only when the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed in all of these cases, but also when the prize ball number reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed. It may be configured. Further, for example, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be executable even when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, and various aspects can be considered.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the prize ball number emphasizing effect is different from the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43, and is irrelevant to the current set value. It is a production that is decided and executed. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize ball number emphasizing effect, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be feasible in a mode suggesting the current set value. For example, the current set value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a display color different from the usual one.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 052IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. (Step 052IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 052IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in the feature unit 052IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS920). Whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, that the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is. When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit (step 052IWS921). Whether or not the variable display this time is a small hit is checked, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. It can be judged by. If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach off symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, there is only a case where the small hit is A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. You can hardly expect a prize. Therefore, by executing the process of steps 052IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents the player from having excessive expectations.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol (N in step 052IWS920) or when there is no small hit variation (N in step 052IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. (Step 052IWS923). In step 052IWS923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right decorative symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are completely inconsistent are received. Determine the combination of matching out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols aligned with the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols on the left, middle, and right is determined. Further, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols including the special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. .. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are even numbers. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 052IWS924). To check whether the variation display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS928 as it is. If the fluctuation is out of alignment (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to set. Determine the presence / absence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the set value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-48, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “2”. The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “3” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “4” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “5” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “ When it is "6", the execution rate is the highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 052IWS928 as it is. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926), that is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 052IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is not determined, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are determined. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-49, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced. The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-49, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6". Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6". Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the probability of continuation is high), and the setting value "6" is set. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state becomes longer without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. Selects a process table according to the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 052IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 052IWS930). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the deviation variation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Variable display during production processing)
FIG. 10-50 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first symbol confirmation command). 1 Whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 052IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. Checks if has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probabilistic big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol variation time timer timed out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 puts the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into a temporary stop state in a state of shaking fluctuation or slight fluctuation.

For example, in the image display device 5, when the fluctuation display of the system small symbol, the fourth symbol, or the like is also executed, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth special symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

(Waiting processing per special figure)
10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9706. When the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the feature unit 052IW, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is performed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9706 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 052IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717. In the feature unit 052IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 052IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 uses the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step 052IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 is deviated from the symbol in step 052IWS9703. Is controlled to be confirmed and displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot generated this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9709). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, whether or not the received display result specification command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be judged by checking. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, when the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started, the display of the number of prize balls is not started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 052IWS9713).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N in step 052IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 052IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704 and N in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing an ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot effect process (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 052IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the process data n. , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 052IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step). 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. Can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the display of the prize ball number display (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS958 to S959, in this example, when a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is displayed. The prize ball number display is erased when the game ends, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS960). Whether or not it is a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS962).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS960 to S962, in this example, when the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, however). In this example, if the prize ball number display is displayed before the 2R probability variation jackpot, the prize ball number display is continuously displayed but the display is not updated), and the high probability after the jackpot game is completed. / The number of prize balls is displayed during the 2nd KT state.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed by the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, the set value suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), when the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is determined in FIG. 10-54 (B1). )-(B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW001,052IW002,052IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the set value suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1), the image display device 5 is set by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 052IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 052IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-54, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown. Is displayed with a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. You can have a sense of expectation for it.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 052IW004 such as "small hit RUSH", and the second KT state. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying a predetermined effect image 052IW005, 052IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where an image of a racing car is displayed as a predetermined effect image 052IW005, 052IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image 052IW005 in a blue display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B2), the predetermined effect image 052IW005 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A, S2019B, S639). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 052IWS2024B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (see steps 052IWS2025B and S639). .. However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (3), the right-handed display 26 is turned on and the right is turned on during the small hit game. The striking notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right-strike display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect will be described. 10-57 and 10-58 are explanatory views for explaining the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. In FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, a case where the jackpot game state is controlled based on the 10R probability variation jackpot is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-57 (A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Big hit!" And the number of rounds such as "Round 2". The prize ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. In addition, when a normal prize (a prize that is not an over prize) occurs in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the prize is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) as shown in FIG. 10-57 (B). 052IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the jackpot game, and the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of over-winning is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (C), the winning display 052IW010 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (see steps 052IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456 and the number of prize balls reaches 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (D), the character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed is shown. For example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is decided, the image display device 5 displays "555". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect C, the image display device 5 displays "666".
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (E), when the jackpot game is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state after the jackpot game is completed. Further, when controlled to the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (F), a character display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" Is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. Is displayed.

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won in the special winning opening, but if it is not decided to execute the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning, FIG. 10-58. As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 052IWS325, S326).

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball wins in the special winning opening, and a suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is produced based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening. It is assumed that the execution of is decided. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (G), the winning display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect, and the speaker. From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability / second KT state and the number of prize balls reaches 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (H), the character display 052IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed is shown. For example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is decided, the image display device 5 displays "2456". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, although the illustration is omitted, for example, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 1000. In that case, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2000, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls has reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a big hit game or a high probability / second KT state). Although the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios according to the total of the game values given by the above, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are performed at different selection ratios. May be configured to perform, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed will be described. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that results in a jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See Y in IWS1128A).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-59 (B). When this is done, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1128A and step 052IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (C). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See Y in IWS1128B).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-59 (E). When this is done, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1128B and step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (F). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification example 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 10-60, the processing of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129A as it is, and transmits the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-60, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the first modification. In FIG. 10-61, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129B as it is, and transmits the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129B). In FIG. 10-61, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the first modification.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 052IWS1127A and step 052IWS1129A).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 052IWS1127B and step 052IWS1129B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (D). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 10-63, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the modified example 2, the determination process of steps 052IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 is used. Instead, it includes the process of step 052IWS1127C.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the second modification. In FIG. 10-64, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 2, the determination processing of steps 052IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the process of step 052IWS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In FIG. 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-65 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See Y in IWS1127C).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127C and step 052IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-65 (C), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See Y in IWS1127D).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (D). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127D and step 052IWS1129B).

Further, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol, other than those shown in the modification 1 and the modification 2, for example, the deviation is lost. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the forced loss is stopped, while the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol which is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is off and fluctuates. Either the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation may be configured to stop forcibly. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed (see FIG. 10-29), but 50 times. When the fluctuation display is finished and the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed, 1 to 4 second hold memories are accumulated, and if there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit, the forced loss stop is performed. This makes it possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. Further, in particular, in a game machine configured to be controllable to a KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in a normal state (low probability / low base state), a second start winning opening that is easy to win a start can be obtained. It is also possible to make a start prize and display the variation of the second special symbol, and at the same time, let the first start prize opening win the start and display the variation of the first special symbol. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification example 3)
In addition, the feature unit 052IW controls to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol by the same control in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, different controls may be used. FIG. 10-66 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 3, the determination processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 is performed. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and 10-67 (C), in the modified example 3, a small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation large hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-59 (A) and 10-59 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and 10-67 (F), the small hit symbol is stopped in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol which is a miss, a small hit, or a probabilistic big hit. When it is displayed, similarly to FIGS. 10-59 (D) and (F), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (B), in the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. In the same manner as in FIG. 10-59 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (E), in the modified example 3, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In, unlike FIG. 10-59 (E), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly removed and forced by the symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to display the stop is different.

In the third modification, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the normal jackpot is normally hit. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is continued, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation display is continued, while the normal jackpot is displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to forcibly stop. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot), it is forcibly missed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot), it fluctuates. It may be configured to continue the display. In this way, the control for forced loss stop may be different depending on whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification example 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 10-68, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1128A are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variation jackpot nor the 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag. Check if it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). The process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the modified example 4, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131A is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the first special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 4. In FIG. 10-69, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 10-22.

In the modified example 4, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128B, the CPU 103 Checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). The process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the modified example 4, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131B is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

In the modified example 4, a case is shown in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the probability change flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability change state), but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to control to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Further, for example, the control may be configured to forcibly stop and display the off symbol only when the high probability / low base state (high probability flag is on and high base flag is off). In this way, any form may be used as long as it is configured to forcibly control the stop display with a detached symbol according to the current gaming state.

In addition, when the control is configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only in the high probability / low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit in the variable display of one of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. is there. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Then, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific area (for example, the special winning opening). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

Specifically, in this example, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit winning based on the fact that the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, since the winning frequency to the special winning opening is particularly high during the small hit RUSH, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize) is executed based on a game ball winning a special winning opening as a specific area. I can't be limited. For example, even if the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning opening 10, and the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening as a specific area. Good. Further, as a specific area, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the entry of the game ball into the out port. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates such as the passing gate 41 as a specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Further, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect) can be executed, and the ease of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period controlled to the special state (for example, FIG. 10-43). As shown in, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed with a 3% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, the prize balls have a 2% probability. The number display suggestion effect B can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 666, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C can be executed with a 1% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, 5 The prize ball number display suggestion effect D can be executed with a% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2555, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E can be executed with a 3% probability, and the number of prize balls is 2666. When the number is reached, there is a 2% chance that the prize ball number display suggestion effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

In this example, the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 as "the length of the period controlled by the special state" (in other words, The case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed in the period until a certain game value is given) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "length of the period controlled to the special state" is controlled to the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) or the special state (in this example, the small hit game state). It may be the length of the period to be used, or it may be the total length of these periods.

When the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is used as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare to the ending of the big hit game, the higher the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than the big hit with a large number of rounds.

Further, for example, as "the length of the period controlled by the special state", the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state are used. Depending on the situation, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of small hits increases, or the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of executions of the variable display increases. .. Further, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and various as "the length of the period controlled by the special state". Aspects are conceivable.

In general, in a game machine, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as "XXXXXX OVER" is displayed, "1000 OVER" of the prize ball number emphasizing effect shown in this example or It is displayed in units that are limited to some extent, such as displaying in units of 1000 prize balls, such as displaying "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in this example is a timing different from the usual timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the occurrence timing of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state, and the game ball wins the special winning opening. Based on what you have done, you can perform a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize and a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning the special winning opening. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game during the small hit fluctuation or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. In this way, any form may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control of the small hit.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17) are played when the game is controlled in an advantageous state and when the game is controlled in a special state. The medium (for example, a game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter or impossible-entry non-easy state (for example, a closed state). Further, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, and the size is large. Based on the fact that a game ball has been won in the winning opening or the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, when the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning in the large prize opening or the special prize opening. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the opening effect is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. In this way, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to be in an easy-to-enter state in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). ), The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052IWS624). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

In this example, it is set as "when the control of the game state is switched" at the start or end of the big hit game, or when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). Although the case where the suggestion effect is configured to be feasible is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the production period when shifting to the jackpot game during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), or shifting from the jackpot game to the high base state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state). The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be feasible during the effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to shift to a high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on executing a predetermined number of fluctuation displays during a high base state or a predetermined number of small hits. In the effect period when shifting from the high base state to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable, and various as "when the control of the game state is switched". Aspects are conceivable.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit and the effect of the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes are conceivable.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state in the special state, the total game value given by the special state in the special state, or the number of times of executing the variable display in the special state. The setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, prizes are awarded with different selection ratios depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. The ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed, or, for example, according to the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state. , The prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios.) Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, as special states, there are an advantageous special state (for example, a second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, a first KT state) that is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous special state. Is controllable. Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect by different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example). Only when a small hit occurs and a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, the case where the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed only when the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, even if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls can be executed, and the game ball is inserted in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. Depending on whether a prize is won or a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state, it is possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect at different rates. It may be configured. Further, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. ..

In the case of the above configuration, if a prize is awarded to the special winning opening in the 1st KT state (high base state) or an irregular winning occurs, or if a winning is generated to the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison with, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate, or a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be performed. It may be configured to run.

In this feature unit 052IW, the value of the prize ball counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). Is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation hit and the 2R normal jackpot and during the high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state). (The prize ball counter is not reset), and in principle, the prize ball number display is hidden, and the 50 times fluctuation display is completed in the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). The case where the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset at the time of transition is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot.

In this example, by configuring as described above, for example, the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is terminated and the high base state (high probability / first KT state, low probability / first KT) is completed. If a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the high base state and then shifts to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) again, the prize during the previous small hit RUSH. The value of the prize ball counter can be updated and the prize ball number display can be displayed while the number of balls is inherited.

In addition, not limited to the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs and the player shifts to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the high probability / second KT state (Small hit RUSH) may be set as one section and the big hit game immediately before the section may be set as one section, and the total number of prize balls in the section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the aggregated value.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, as a "setting suggestion effect", a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect is performed in a manner in which the current set value suggests one of the set values "1" to "6". Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of suggesting the current set value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a manner of suggesting whether or not the setting change has been made to change the set value when the power is turned on to the game machine. Good. As such, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any form of suggestion regarding the setting.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display display result is special. When the display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed). Further, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first 2 The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed). Further, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display, the variable display of the identification information of one of them is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is an outlier symbol). Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information is a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) even though the state has shifted to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probability change state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forced off), even if the variable display is a probable change jackpot, it will be forcibly removed. Therefore, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is forcibly removed, the fluctuation display that is a probability variation jackpot is extended (interruption of measurement of fluctuation time). , While suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, as an aspect of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), and the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that was interrupted after the end of the small hit game is resumed. You may. It suffices as long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)) can be controlled. Further, the first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize control considering whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control the specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific region (for example, V region 052IW104) while being controlled to the advantageous state. Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Fig. 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the first identification is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is displayed. Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)) can be controlled. Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state, and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-68 and 10-). 69). Further, when controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state). A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state). For example, it can be controlled to either the small hit game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. Further, the first start area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the movement path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is out of the movement path. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, a right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific route, and the first identification information is variably displayed. When the special state is controlled after the execution of, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 10-56 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature unit 052IW, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be executed. It is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small hit type on the 2nd special symbol side, and when the small hit is made in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special When the variable display of the symbol is forcibly removed and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is practically Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player wastes the game ball, and on the contrary, a disadvantageous launch promotion notification is given, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information. The information is provided as a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold storage. Further, when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is set. It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) is displayed. It is possible to control the small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2) are lit) and the first specific notification are more visible than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute a highly likely second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56 (1)). Further, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 10-56 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the control is performed in the special state. At that time, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-56 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state, a higher ratio is more advantageous than when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-56 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) at least corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. Further, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of a common mode between when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained. , Forcibly stop and display the non-reach out-of-reach symbol). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. On top of that, the reserved memory stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second identification information from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the capture measures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. It is provided with an effect control means for controlling (for example, an effect control CPU 120). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The case is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made by the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a game machine configured as described above, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. If a big hit occurs, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing the right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even in the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a game machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are lit. The right-handed display 052IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right-handed notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, the right-handed display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37. May be configured to execute right-handed notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type. The selection ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the case is a small hit or a small hit is obtained by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls can be easily selected. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if a small hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). See -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, as special states, there are a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in the game machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display to be displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects are conceivable.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined by using the special type determination value (for example, the small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of small hit types is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the small hit type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). In addition, the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the jackpot type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display mode is determined by using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in factors other than the big hit lottery. It is not preferable because the degree (difference in ball ejection performance) is greatly different, but in this feature unit 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern common regardless of the set value, such a problem does not occur. ing.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the case where the fluctuation pattern allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the fluctuation efficiency is set to be different depending on the set value by making the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time. It may be configured so that the advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. It is decided that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the variable display and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) is included. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the second identification information in the specific state can be displayed in a variable manner. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased. Further, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54) that suggests a set value is executed. Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special judgment values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the judgment corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forced loss stop). It was not possible to realize control that takes into account. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 052IW with a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the game machines shown in the following (means A1) to (means A6) are shown below. The characteristic composition of is also disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, a special state (for example, a portion in which steps S122 to S125 are executed in CPU103) and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, a variable display execution means including a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a small hit game state). Is the identification of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of the identification information is being executed. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues. (Executed), the second control (for example, the outlier symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the first special symbol or the first special symbol)) that derives and displays the variable display of one of the identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, the outlier symbol). The variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol))), and the first control and the second control are performed according to the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B depending on the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. In the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. Therefore, steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In the means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is likely to be given. Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion for executing step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). Specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is different and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the portion that executes step 052IWS2206) in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. (For example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the non-specific state is controlled based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot). It may be configured so that it is not controlled to a probabilistic state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of means A1 to means A3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The specific state control means includes a control means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the specific state control means is a specific area (for example, when it is controlled to an advantageous state). Based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the V region 052IW104), it is possible to control the game to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 052IWS2404. (S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the second specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, while the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. As shown in the above, in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any of means A1 to means A4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends). The variable display executing means can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4), which is a variable display of the first identification information and a second specific display result. While the variable display corresponding to is being executed, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a modified example). In 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when N in step 052IWS1128A. See FIG. 10-67 (B)), and the second identification information is variable. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is displayed with the predetermined display result. Control for derivation and display is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67. (E) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to means A5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The variable display executing means includes means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the variable display executing means provides the first identification information and the first identification information when controlled to a specific state. Based on the fact that the special display result was derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is Y in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A is executed. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69.) When the non-specific state is controlled, the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variable. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see FIG. 10-69.). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forced loss stop). It was not possible to realize control that takes into account. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 052IW with a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the game machines shown in the following (means B1) to (means B6) are shown below. The characteristic composition of is also disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, a special state (for example, a portion in which steps S122 to S125 are executed in CPU 103) and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, a variable display execution means including a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a small hit game state). Can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), Variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The first control (for example, the first fluctuation time) in which the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of The update of the timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example,). The second control (for example, the missing symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol)) is performed. It is feasible, and which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically). CPU103) is step 052 Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S1130B are executed according to the determination results of IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is likely to be given. Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion for executing step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). A specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is different and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the portion that executes step 052IWS2206) in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. (For example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the non-specific state is controlled based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot). It may be configured so that it is not controlled to a probabilistic state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of means B1 to means B3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The specific state control means includes a control means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the specific state control means has a specific area (for example, for example) when it is controlled in an advantageous state. Based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the V region 052IW104), it is possible to control the game to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 052IWS2404. (S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the second specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, while the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. As shown in the above, in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to the means B4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends). The variable display executing means is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. , The variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is N in step 052IWS1128A, steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A. 10-67 (B).), A special display in the variable display of the first identification information during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the second identification information. When the result is derived and displayed, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the second identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)). Does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67 (E)). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means B6) In any of means B1 to means B5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The variable display executing means includes means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the variable display executing means provides the first identification information and the first identification information when controlled to a specific state. Based on the fact that the special display result was derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is Y in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A is executed. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69.) When the non-specific state is controlled, the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variable. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see FIG. 10-69.). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 052IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 21TM to form a game machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 052IW to enable the set value suggestion effect, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Right-handed notification can be executed, over-winning suggestion effect can be executed, small hit winning suggestion effect can be executed, and prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed. You may do it. Further, for example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 052IW, and a small hit is obtained in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed. In that case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed or the variable display may be continued by the symbol.

Further, when the configuration shown in the feature unit 021TM is applied, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the setting value may be suggested by changing the mode of the ending effect. In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including a small hit RUSH or a chance mode may be executed, a card forgetting prevention notification such as a prepaid card may be executed, or a maker logo display may be displayed. It is configured to suggest the set value by configuring and changing the mode transition notification, the card forgetting prevention notification, the display mode of the maker logo display, and the display mode of the image to be displayed at the same time. You may.

By combining the gaming machines described in the patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-033787) and the patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902), a setting suggestion effect can be produced in a game configured to be controllable in a special state. It can be configured to be feasible. However, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game simply by executing the setting suggestion effect in the game that is configured to be controllable in a special state. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 052IW with a game machine capable of improving the interest of the setting suggestion effect, the characteristic configurations of the game machines shown in the following (means C1) to (means C7) are shown. Is also disclosed.

(Means C1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can play a game and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. Steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100, which is a game machine that can be set to a value and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, are executed. Part) and a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. , A portion for executing steps 052IWS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2213 in the game control microcomputer 100, which can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state. ) And a setting suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize) that can be executed in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). It is characterized by including an execution means (for example, a portion that executes 052IWS323 and S324 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the advantageous state control means can control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls a special state (for example, a small hit game state) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result. Display result determination means for determining the display result of the variable display by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). (For example, a portion for executing steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, S64B in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the determination value is used to determine to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result. The specific judgment value (for example, the judgment value for big hit judgment) and the special judgment value for determining to derive and display the special display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) A setting means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") that are included and have a different number of specific determination values. The portion for executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) in the above is provided, and the number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or the means C2, the setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit during the high probability / second KT state). Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

(Means C4) In any of means C1 to C3, when controlled in an advantageous state and controlled in a special state, variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning). A variable means capable of controlling the ball device 17) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an easy-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium (for example, a game ball) is difficult or impossible to enter. A control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S122 to S124, S126, S127 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means corresponds to the fact that the variable means is controlled to be in an easy-to-enter state. , The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, and a game ball is won in the large winning opening or the special winning opening. Therefore, it may be configured so that the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit and the suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls can be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to the means C4, the setting suggestion effect executing means is usually when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, from the low probability / first KT state). It is configured so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052IWS624) when the state (low probability / low base state) is entered. May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

(Means C6) In any of the means C1 to the means C5, the setting suggestion effect executing means controls the number of times to control the special state in the special state, the total game value given by the special state in the special state, or Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666). Depending on the arrival of, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios, or, for example, the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state or the high probability / second KT state. It may be configured to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F at different selection ratios according to the number of times the variable display is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

(Means C7) In any one of the means C1 to the means C6, the special state control means is disadvantageous to the player as a special state as compared with the advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and the advantageous special state. It is possible to control to a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state), and the setting suggestion effect executing means plays a specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and during the disadvantageous special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios depending on when the medium passes (for example, only when the game ball wins a small hit in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the suggestion at the time of the small hit winning is made. It may be configured to perform an effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

(Explanation of feature section 020SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 020SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH includes a game state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, a hold storage means, a setting means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the hold storage means, and the setting means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect executing means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can be controlled into an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small hit gaming state.

The special state is a state that is easily controlled by the special state, for example, the second KT state. The second KT state is a game state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a game state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. The non-special state is a gaming state in which it is more difficult to control the special state than the special state, and is, for example, the first KT state. The first KT state is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, but it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening. The frequency of small hits may be the same when comparing the second KT state and the first KT state, but the time in which the second KT state is controlled by the small hit game (for example, opening time, etc.) may be the same. ) Is long, so it is easy to be controlled by a small hit game.

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the advantageous state and the special state are states in which variable display (also referred to as "variable display") is not performed. Specifically, the state in which the variable display is not performed is a state in which identification information (big hit symbol) indicating an advantageous state is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed, or identification information (small) indicating a special state. The winning symbol) is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. For example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel at the same time, the state in which the variable display is not performed means that one of the symbols (special symbol) is a jackpot symbol or This includes the case where the small hit symbol is being displayed as a derivation stop display, and the other symbol is being suspended from the variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state (small hit game state) in the special state (second KT state), the effect executing means can execute the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state. Is. When the special state is controlled in the special state (second KT state), the game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. Therefore, the effect executing means executes, for example, a special effect for notifying the small hit game.

On the other hand, when the effect executing means is controlled to a special state in the non-special state (first KT state), it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests a content advantageous to the player. .. Even if the special state is controlled in the non-special state (first KT state), the game ball rarely wins in the special winning opening. Therefore, in the non-special state, the effect executing means does not execute the special effect.

The suggestion effect is, for example, a hold change suggestion effect based on the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, a probability change notification effect, and the like, as will be described later. However, the suggestion effect is not limited to these, and may be, for example, today's maximum number of consecutive villas in pachinko game machine 1, total variable display number, total number of prize balls, etc. There may be. Further, the content that is advantageous to the player, which is suggested by the suggestion effect, may be any information that the player wants to know in playing the game, and for example, the content that suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous state ( For example, suggestion that it is a low setting value) is also included.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means can perform the variable display of the decorative identification information in response to the variable display of the identification information. The decorative identification information is, for example, a decorative pattern. Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the effect executing means displays the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The special display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating small hits (for example, "1, 3, 5"). When the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the effect executing means may display a specific character indicating that the special state is controlled.

Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect executing means displays a predetermined display result different from the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The predetermined display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating loss. The combination of lost symbols may be randomly determined for each variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is a display result indicating that the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state for the variable display that has not been started yet. To do. The determination made by the pre-start determination means is, for example, a look-ahead determination, specifically, a determination having the same contents as the various determinations made when starting the variable display, and the determination made before the various timings. is there. The various determinations include, for example, a jackpot determination, a jackpot type determination, a fluctuation pattern determination, and the like.

The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect that gives a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. The suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is, for example, a suggestion of an effect performed based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the hold storage means stores the information related to the variable display as the hold storage information. The hold storage information is, for example, information that has been determined by the pre-start determination means, but may include information that has not been determined. The effect executing means displays the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means as a hold display. For example, the effect executing means holds and displays the reserved storage information in a display mode according to the determination result by the pre-start determination means. The display mode of the hold display includes a normal display mode and a special display mode having a higher expectation than the normal display mode.

In addition, the effect executing means can execute an action effect that acts on the hold display in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the effect executing means can execute an action effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change as the hold change suggestion effect. For example, the action effect is an effect of clarifying the hold display of the target that may change and performing some action on the hold display of the target. Specifically, the action effect is, for example, an effect in which an object hits the hold display of the target, an effect in which lightning strikes the hold display of the target, and the like. In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, there are times when the display mode of the hold display changes and times when the display mode of the hold display does not change. An effect in which the action effect is performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change is a so-called Gase effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “Gase hold change suggestion effect”). It should be noted that the suggestion effect for suggesting the pre-start determination means is not limited to the hold change suggestion effect. For example, when the hold storage information determined to be a big hit is stored, or when the hold storage information determined to be a look-ahead variation pattern of the SP (super) reach that is lost is stored. It may be an effect of displaying a background image or a character image suggesting that the hold storage information having a high expectation of a big hit is stored.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the setting means can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. The set value is a plurality of values set corresponding to the winning probability of the jackpot, and is, for example, a value set to any one of "1" to "6". The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as “set value suggestion effect”) that gives a suggestion regarding the setting means. The set value suggestion effect is an effect of causing the player to guess the set value, for example, by using the background image or the character image. The set value suggestion effect may be an effect indicating the set value itself. In the feature unit 020SH, the set value suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the set value is higher than when the set value is low.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the non-special state includes a first non-special state and a second non-special state that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the first non-special state. The first non-special state is a non-probability change state (low probability state), for example, a low probability / first KT state. The second non-special state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), for example, a high probability / first KT state. The effect executing means can execute a common effect when it is controlled in the first non-special state and when it is controlled in the second non-special state. The common effect is, for example, an effect controlled by a common effect mode (“chance time mode” in the embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH). The effect mode is, for example, an effect in which a specific effect image different from the usual one, a specific BGM, or the like is executed over one or a plurality of variable displays. The effect image referred to here is, for example, a background image, a character image, a hold image, an active display image, an interface image, a decorative pattern image of a display mode, and the like.

Further, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the second non-special state is controlled (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “probability change suggestion effect”). The probability change suggestion effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image (for example, a specific background image, a specific character image, a character image, etc.) suggesting that the second non-special state is controlled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects having different modes as the suggestive effects. As described above, the plurality of types of suggestion effects include a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect. In addition, there are a plurality of types of suggestion effects for each suggestion effect. For example, in the case of a hold change suggestion effect, there may be an effect in which the hold display is likely to change and an effect in which the hold display is unlikely to change. Further, for example, in the case of the setting value suggestion effect, there are a mode suggesting that the setting value is likely to be high, a mode suggesting that the setting value is likely to be low, and the like. Further, in the case of the probabilistic change suggestion effect, there are a mode suggesting that the probability of being controlled in the probabilistic state is high, and a mode suggesting that the possibility of being controlled in the probabilistic state is low.

In the feature unit 020SH, the degree of advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of suggestion effect is executed. For example, in the set value suggestion effect, when the set value suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is high is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is likely to be low is performed. It is more advantageous for the player than when it is broken. Further, for example, in the probabilistic suggestion effect, when the probabilistic suggestion effect suggesting that the probabilistic state is likely to be controlled is executed, it is suggested that the probability of being controlled to the probabilistic state is low. It is more advantageous for the player than when the probabilistic change suggestion effect of the aspect is executed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH includes a first variable winning means. The first variable winning means is, for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (see FIG. 1) having a second starting winning opening. The first variable winning means can be changed into a first state (open state) in which the game medium easily passes through the starting area and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium does not easily pass through the starting area.

The game state control means can control the first variable winning means to a predetermined state in which the first variable winning means is likely to change to the first state. The predetermined state is, for example, a non-special state, specifically, a first KT state (a game state in which a small hit game in which a game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed). The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect when it is controlled to a special state in a predetermined state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH includes a second variable winning means. The second variable winning means is, for example, a special variable winning ball device 17 (see FIG. 1) having a special winning opening for small hits. The second variable winning means can be changed into a winning easy state (open state) in which the game ball is easy to win and a winning difficult state (closed state) in which the game ball is difficult to win. The second variable winning means can be changed to a winning easy state in a special state (small hit game state). The effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the winning easy state. Specifically, for example, the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in accordance with the opening timing of the second variable winning means.

Further, in the game machine according to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state (small hit) in the special state (for example, the second KT state), based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the special area. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the passage of a special area of the game medium. Specifically, the special region is a region (for example, a V region or a discharge region) through which the game ball winning the special variable winning device 7 passes. The game ball that has passed through the special area is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening. As a result, the prize balls are paid out. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect showing a prize in the special variable winning device 7, or an effect of adding the number of prize balls paid out by the prize.

Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the effect executing means does not execute the predetermined effect regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area. Specifically, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect without executing the predetermined effect.

(Regarding the game state and transition of the production mode after the big hit game in the feature unit 020SH)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-1, the transition of the gaming state after the big hit game in the feature unit 020SH and the transition of the effect mode according to the gaming state will be described. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game according to the feature unit 020SH. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the feature unit 020SH, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the normal mode is controlled. Moreover, in the high probability / low base state, it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Moreover, in the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state, it is controlled to the Chantime mode. That is, in the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state, a common effect is executed.

Further, as for the effect during the big hit game, a common effect may be executed depending on whether the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit is executed or the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit is executed. That is, it is sufficient that the combination of the common decorative symbols is stopped and displayed for the 6R probability variation jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot, and the common jackpot effect is executed even during each jackpot game. As a result, whether the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot was executed (whether it is controlled to the high probability / high base state) or the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot was executed (to the low probability / high base state). It is possible to prevent the player from discriminating whether it is controlled).

In the feature unit 020SH, in the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the normal jackpot determined in the jackpot type determination is not determined to be a 6R normal jackpot in principle, but is determined to be a 2R normal jackpot. Therefore, when the 2R jackpot game is executed in the KT state, the player knows that the transition to the low probability / high base state has occurred or that the low probability / high base state has been continued. Therefore, when the jackpot game based on the 2R normal jackpot is executed in the KT state, an effect of notifying the low probability / high base state (a separately prepared jackpot effect or effect mode) may be executed.

Further, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the KT state, the player knows that the transition to the high probability / high base state or the continuation of the high probability / high base state has been continued. .. Therefore, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the KT state, an effect of notifying the high probability / high base state (a separately prepared jackpot effect or effect mode) may be executed. In other words, the chance time mode may be controlled only in the so-called first hit case, that is, the transition from the normal state to the high probability / high base state or the transition to the low probability / high base state. It may be limited to the case where.

In the jackpot type determination, the 6R normal jackpot may be determined without determining the 2R normal jackpot. As a result, in the KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is executed and the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed. Can be prevented from being determined by the player (whether it is controlled to a high probability / high base state or controlled to a low probability / high base state).

(Example of effect mode setting process related to feature unit 020SH)
Next, an example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11-2. FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH. The effect mode setting process is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 020SHS11). When the jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received (step 020SHS11: YES), that is, when a jackpot occurs, the effect control CPU 120 determines the probability variation jackpot. (Step 020SHS12). If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode (step 020SHS14). End a series of processing. In the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may determine an effect mode (separately prepared effect mode) for notifying a low probability / high base state.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS12, when it is a probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS13). In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS13: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode by shifting to step 020SHS14. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a common effect (chance mode) in the case of the normal jackpot and the case of the 6R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, when it is not a 6R probability variation big hit (step 020SHS13: NO), the effect control CPU 120 decides to control the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS15), and ends a series of processes.

In step 020SHS11, when the big hit start designation command is not received (step 020SHS11: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS16). When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS16: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the small hit start designation command is not received (step 020SHS16: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17). In step 020SHS17, the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the reception waiting time of the command (corresponding to the “predetermined period” in step 020SHS17) Determine if it has passed.

In step 020SHS17, when the predetermined period has not elapsed (step 020SHS17: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17: YES), that is, when it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", the effect control CPU 120 has the value of the effect high base number counter "0". (Step 020SHS18). When the value of the effect high base number counter is "0" (step 020SHS18: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the value of the production high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS18: NO), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the production high base number counter by "1" (step 020SHS19).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect high base number counter has become “0” (step 020SHS20). When the value of the effect high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS20: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the value of the effect high base count counter becomes "0" (step 020SHS20: YES), the effect control CPU 120 decides to control the effect mode to the normal mode (step 020SHS21), and a series of series. End the process.

In the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, when the big hit game is executed and then controlled to the high probability / high base state or the low probability / high base state by the process of steps 020SHS12 to 14, it is common. It is controlled by the chance time mode, which is a production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the control is in the high probability / high base state or in the low probability / high base state.

(Example of variable display compatible display control processing related to feature unit 020SH)
Next, an example of the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) control process related to the feature unit 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display compatible display control process according to the feature unit 020SH. The variable display compatible display control process is a process executed in the look-ahead notice setting process of S161 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start winning designation command has been received (step 020SHS31). When the start prize designation command (first valid start prize designation command or second valid start prize designation command) has not been received (step 020SHS31: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the start prize designation command is received (step 020SHS31: YES), the initial color which is the display mode at the start of the hold display is determined (step 020SHS32), and the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display). The final color, which is the final display mode of the above, is determined (step 020SHS33). In the determination of the initial color and the determination of the final color, the initial color determination table and the final color determination table described below are used.

(Initial color determination table and final color determination table for variable display compatible display)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table of the variable display compatible display. In FIG. 11-4, (A) shows an initial color determination table, and (B) shows a final color determination table. In (A), the display mode indicates a display mode when the variable display compatible display (hold display) is started. Further, in (B), the display mode indicates the display mode of the variable display compatible display (active display) to be finally displayed.

In the feature unit 020SH, the display mode of the variable display compatible display is such that the variable display is being executed, the variable display is started (so-called hold shift), or the small hit game is being executed in the chance time mode. It can be changed at the change timing. In (A) and (B), four types of display modes are shown: "red", "green", "blue", and "gray". The display mode of "ash" is a normal display mode. Further, the display modes of "red", "green" and "blue" are special display modes different from the normal display modes.

Further, in (A) and (B), the fluctuation pattern indicates any one of "big hit", "SP (super) reach loss", and "other loss". Here, in the feature unit 020SH, the production mainly in the chance time mode (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state) will be described. Therefore, in FIG. 11-4, the high probability / high base is shown. The variation patterns used in the state or the low probability / high base state (variation patterns shown in FIGS. 10-8 (E) and 10-9 (H)) will be described as an example.

The fluctuation pattern of the "big hit" is, for example, the second fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 28 in which the fluctuation time is 2 minutes. In the second fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 28, the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The fluctuation pattern of "SP reach loss" is, for example, the second fluctuation pattern # 09, # 12, # 24, # 27 in which the fluctuation time is 2 minutes. In the second variation pattern # 09, # 12, # 24, # 27, the decorative symbol indicating the loss is stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The fluctuation pattern of "other loss" is, for example, the second fluctuation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 23 having a fluctuation time of 1 second or 5 seconds.

In addition, the "other loss" fluctuation pattern is the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, #, which is selected when the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds and it is determined to be a small hit. 26 is included. In the second fluctuation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 23 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, # 26 in which the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds, the decorative pattern is variablely displayed. The mode does not change to the SP reach mode, and the definite decorative symbol of the combination of losses is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the second fluctuation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 23 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, # 26 in which the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds, the normal reach effect is produced. It may be performed and the definite decorative symbol of the combination of the loss in the reach mode may be stopped and displayed.

As shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "big hit", "red" is most likely to be selected, then "green" is most likely to be selected, and then "blue" is most likely to be selected as the final color display mode. , "Ash" is the most difficult to select. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach loss", "green" is most likely to be selected, then "red" is most likely to be selected, and then "blue" is the final color display mode. It is easy to select, and "ash" is the most difficult to select. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of "other loss", "gray" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, and then "green" as the final color display mode. Is easy to select, and "red" is the most difficult to select. Therefore, when the jackpot expectation of the display mode is expressed by an inequality sign, it becomes "red"> "green"> "blue"> "gray".

On the other hand, as shown in (A), in any of the fluctuation patterns, "gray" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, and then "green" is selected as the initial color display mode. It is easy to do, and "red" is the most difficult to select. As a result, at the timing of changing the display mode, it is possible to gradually change from the display mode having a low expectation to the display mode with a high expectation. Further, when comparing (A) and (B) with respect to the fluctuation pattern of "other loss", it is easier to select the display mode ("blue" and "green") with higher expectation in (B). ing. As a result, even in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "other loss", it is possible to gradually change from the display mode with low expectation to the display mode with high expectation. Further, in the feature unit 020SH, the display mode is changed to a display mode with a low degree of expectation, that is, the so-called effect is prevented from falling.

Returning to FIG. 11-3, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial color and the final color, it compares the expected degree of the determined initial color and the display mode of the final color, and is more final than the expected degree of the display mode of the initial color. It is determined whether or not the degree of expectation of the color display mode is high (step 020SHS34). When the degree of expectation indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display according to the initial color display mode. (Step 020SHS37). If the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode, and if a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed, the effect is reduced. Therefore, by shifting to step 020SHS37, the change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS34, when the degree of expectation indicated by the final color display mode is higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final color display mode. , Store in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 020SHS35).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed (step 020SHS36). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display (hold display) according to the initial color display mode (step 020SHS37), and ends a series of processes.

(An example of suggestion effect execution processing performed by the effect control CPU 120 when controlled to a small hit game state)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6, an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the small hit game state is controlled will be described. 11-5 and 11-6 are flowcharts showing an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the small hit game state is controlled. The suggestion effect execution process shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS51). When the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS51: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (first KT state) (step 020SHS52). When the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53).

When the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is set to execute the effect (effect for notifying the small hit) according to the small hit RUSH mode. (Step 020SHS54), a series of processes is completed. On the other hand, when the effect mode is not controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: NO), that is, when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 produces an effect (loss) according to the normal mode. Production: Make a setting (step 020SHS55) to execute (continuously display the decorative pattern stopped and displayed by the combination of loss), and end a series of processing.

In step 020SHS52, when the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is set with a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed. It is determined whether or not the flag has been set (step 020SHS56). When the change flag is not set (step 020SHS56: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when the change flag is set (step 020SHS56: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57).

When the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57: YES), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS57: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS58). In determining the presence or absence of the hold change suggestion effect, the hold change suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a determination table for various suggestion effects. FIG. 11-7 (A) shows a pending change suggestion effect determination table. The hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining either "with hold change suggestion effect" or "without hold change suggestion effect". "With hold change suggestion effect" indicates that after the hold change suggestion effect is performed (for example, at the start of the next variable display), a series of change effects in which the display mode of the hold display changes is performed. "No hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (the change effect is not performed).

In FIG. 11-7 (A), the determination ratio of "with pending change suggestion effect" is higher than the determination ratio of "without pending change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small hit game state, when the hold display has not changed to the display mode of the final color, the hold change suggestion effect is likely to be performed. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold display is changed to a display mode in which the display mode of the hold display being displayed shows a higher expectation level by performing the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, for example, if the display mode of the hold display at the present time is "gray", it changes to "blue", and if the display mode of the hold display at the present time is "blue", it changes to "green". I will do it.

The display mode of the hold display after the change is not limited to the display mode in which the degree of expectation is increased by one step, and may be a display mode in which the degree of expectation is increased by two steps or a display mode in which the degree of expectation is increased by three steps. Good. Specifically, the display mode for changing the display mode of the hold display may be a display mode that is less than or equal to the expected degree indicated by the final color. For example, when there are a plurality of display modes up to the display mode of the final color. (For example, when the initial color is "gray" and the final color is "red"), one of multiple display modes ("blue", "green", "red") is determined. You may try to do it.

Further, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, whether or not to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is determined each time, for example, when the variable display or the small hit game is executed. I decided to do it, but it is not limited to this. For example, a scenario (story) indicating the timing of performing the change effect up to the final color may be determined in advance, and whether or not the change effect is performed may be determined by referring to the scenario. Further, by including the transition of the display mode in the scenario, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the change effect and the color after the change by referring to the scenario.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59). When the hold change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS59: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when performing the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS60). Specifically, in step 020SHS60, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color. To judge.

When the display mode of the hold display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS60: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS62. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS60: YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS61). Then, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS62), and ends a series of processes. An example of the pending change suggestion effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-10, but is a series of effects including a first fanning effect, a second fanning effect, and an action effect.

In FIG. 11-6, in step 020SHS64, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS63). In determining the presence or absence of the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (B) shows a set value suggestion effect determination table. The set value suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect and the type of the set value suggestion effect for each set value. In FIG. 11-7 (B), the “set value” indicates any one of “1” to “6”.

In addition, the "type" of the setting value suggestion effect is "odd number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an odd number setting, "even number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an even number setting, and the setting value. Shows three types, "suggestion of set value 4 or more", which suggests that is "4" or more. The effect of "suggesting an odd number setting" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an odd number (any of "1", "3", and "5"). The effect of "even number setting suggestion" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an even number (any of "2", "4", and "6"). The effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is 4 or more (any of "4", "5", and "6").

Further, the set value suggestion effect has a different effect mode for each type, for example, the background image is different. The background image is, for example, an image showing the morning in the case of the "odd number setting suggestion" effect, and an image showing the daytime in the case of the "even number setting suggestion" effect. In the case, it is an image showing the night.

As shown in the set value suggestion effect determination table, "no set value suggestion effect" is determined at the highest ratio regardless of whether the "set value" is "1" to "6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value suggestion effect from being performed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value.

Further, the effect of the "odd number setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "setting value" becomes higher as "1", "3", and "5". Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "5" by producing the "odd number setting suggestion" effect. Similarly, the effect of "even number setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" becomes higher as "2", "4", and "6". Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "6" by producing the "even number setting suggestion" effect. Further, the effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" becomes higher as "4", "5", and "6". Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "6" by performing the effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more".

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the set value suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect in step 020SHS63 (step 020SHS64). When performing the set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS64: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS65), and ends a series of processes. An example of the set value suggestion effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11-12, but the set value suggestion effect is a series of effects including the first fanning effect and the second fanning effect. On the other hand, when the set value suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS64: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the probabilistic arousal effect (step 020SHS66). In determining the presence or absence of the probabilistic arousal effect, the probabilistic abduction effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (C) shows a probability change suggestion effect determination table. The probability change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence / absence of the probability change suggestion effect and the type of the probability change suggestion effect for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. In FIG. 11-7 (C), the "probability state" is a "high probability" which is a probabilistic state (high probability / high base state) and a "low probability" which is a non-probability state (low probability / high base state). Indicates one of. In addition, the types of probabilistic suggestion effects are "suggesting high probability", which suggests that there is a high probability of being in a high probability state, and "suggesting high probability", which suggests that there is a high probability of being in a high probability state. There are three types, "suggesting a possibility" that suggests "probability" and "suggesting a low probability" that suggests that the possibility of being in a high probability state is lower than "suggesting a possibility".

As shown in the probability change suggestion effect determination table, "no probability change suggestion effect" is determined at the highest ratio regardless of whether the "probability state" is "high probability" or "low probability". As a result, the probability change suggestion effect can be prevented from being performed frequently, and the player cannot easily guess whether the player is controlled in the high probability state or the low probability state. be able to.

In addition, as shown in the probability change suggestion effect determination table, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the rate at which "no probability change suggestion effect" is determined is lower than in the case of "low probability". That is, the rate at which any kind of probability change suggestion effect is determined is high. As a result, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the probability change state is controlled by the probability change suggestion effect itself.

In addition, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the effect of "suggesting a high possibility" is most likely to be determined, followed by the effect of "suggesting a medium possibility", which suggests a "small possibility". Is the most difficult to determine. In addition, when the "probability state" is "low probability", the effect of "suggesting low possibility" is most likely to be determined, followed by the effect of "suggesting medium possibility", which suggests "high possibility". Is the most difficult to determine. As a result, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a high probability state when the effect of "suggesting a high probability" is performed. Further, when the effect of "suggesting the possibility" is performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the control is in the high probability state or the low probability state. In addition, when the effect of "suggesting low probability" is performed, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a low probability state.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the probability change suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the probability change suggestion effect in step 020SHS66 (step 020SHS67). When performing the probability change suggestion effect (step 020SHS68: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the probability change suggestion effect (step 020SHS69), and ends a series of processes. The probability change suggestion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 11-13, but is a series of effects including the first fanning effect and the second fanning effect. On the other hand, when the probability change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS68: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not all the final colors of the hold storage during the hold display are determined to be gray (step 020SHS69). Specifically, in step 020SHS69, the effect control CPU 120 sets the final color of the hold storage being displayed by referring to the display mode of the final color of each hold storage stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122. Judge whether all are decided to be gray.

When the final color of the hold storage during the hold display is not all determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: NO), that is, at least one of the hold memories during the hold display is determined to be the special display mode. If so, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the first fanning effect (see (C) in FIG. 11-10) (step 020SHS73), and ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when all the final colors of the hold storage during the hold display are determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS70). The Gase hold change suggestion effect is a hold change suggestion effect that is executed even though the display mode of the hold display does not change, and as a result, the hold change suggestion effect is a series of effects that becomes a Gase effect. In determining the presence or absence of the Gase hold change suggestion effect, the Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (D) shows a Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table. The Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining either "Gase hold change suggestion effect" or "Gase hold change suggestion effect not present". "Gase hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the display mode of the hold display does not change after the hold change suggestion effect is performed (for example, at the start of the next variable display). “No hold change suggestion effect” indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (no change effect is performed).

The decision rate of "with Gase hold change suggestion effect" is higher than the decision rate of "without Gase hold change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small hit game state, the production can be made lively by the effect of suggesting a change on hold.

In the feature unit 020SH, the Gase hold change suggestion effect is executed as the Gase effect, but the Gase setting value suggestion effect that is not performed by pretending to be the set value suggestion effect may be executed, or the probability change. It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect that does not pretend to be a suggestion effect.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 020SHS70 whether or not to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect, and as a result, determines whether or not to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS71). When performing the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS71: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS72), and ends a series of processes. The Gase hold change suggestion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 11-11, but is a series of effects including a first fanning effect, a second fanning effect, and an action effect. On the other hand, when the Gase hold change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS71: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS74.

By the above-mentioned processing, in the small hit game state in the chance time mode (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state), one of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect. It becomes possible to execute the suggestion effect of.

(An example of change effect execution processing of variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display)
Next, an example of the change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8. FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of a change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display. The variable display compatible display change effect execution process shown in FIG. 11-8 is a process executed in the variable display start waiting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is set is set (step 020SHS101). When the change flag is not set (step 020SHS101: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the change flag is set (step 020SHS101: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS102).

When the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS102: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS102: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the target variable display compatible display is the active display (step). 020SHS103). When the target variable display compatible display is the active display (step 020SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the active display to forcibly execute the final color display mode (step 020SHS107). ).

Here, in step 020SHS107, the display mode of the active display changes from the current display mode to the display mode of the final color, so that the display mode may change to a display mode in which the degree of expectation is one step higher. It may change to a display mode in which the degree is increased by two or more steps. On the other hand, when the target variable display compatible display is not the active display (step 020SHS103: NO), it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display (step 020SHS104). The rate of determining to change the display mode of the hold display is, for example, the decision rate of changing the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game (hold change suggestion shown in FIG. 11-7 (A)). The ratio is the same as the ratio for determining the effect: 70/100), but may be different.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 does not change the display mode of the hold display as a result of the determination in step 020SHS104 (step 020SHS105: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when changing the display mode of the hold display (step 020SHS105: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS106). Specifically, in step 020SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color. To judge.

When the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS106: YES), the hold display is set to execute the change effect for changing to the display mode of the final color (step 020SHS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS108) and ends a series of processes. In step 020SHS106, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS106: NO), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the hold display to a display mode with a higher expectation. Is made (step 020SHS109), and a series of processes is completed.

It should be noted that the change effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the variable display and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game are different effects. Specifically, in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the variable display, the hold change suggestion effect is not performed.

(Example of transition of the production screen in the small hit RUSH mode)
Next, an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-9. Note that FIG. 11-9 shows the transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during the small hit RUSH mode (high probability / in the second KT state). FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode.

FIG. 11-9 (A) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small symbol 020SH201 are variably displayed on the image display device 5. In the small hit RUSH mode, only the small symbol 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 020SH200. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a display result and a variation pattern (for example, the second variation pattern # 32 in FIG. 10-9) specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11. ) And the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various advance notice effects, and the execution of various effects such as the effect mode according to the game state. The presence / absence, its mode, the execution start timing, etc. are determined, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the determination result.

Further, in (A), the total prize ball number display 020SH204 is displayed. The total number of prize balls display 020SH204 indicates the total number of prize balls in the consecutive chan including the small hit RUSH mode. Further, in (A), a notification image including the characters "right-handed" is displayed as a notification image corresponding to the right-handed notification in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, this notification image may include an image showing an arrow pointing to the right in order to encourage right-handed striking. Further, in FIG. 11-9, the hold display and the active display are not displayed, but these may be displayed. In the screen shown in (A), when the variable display stop timing is reached, the screen transitions to the screen in (B).

FIG. 11-9 (B) shows a screen when the fluctuation is stopped when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small hit notification image 020SH202 indicating a small hit, and stops at a definite symbol "1, 3, 5" in which the small symbol 020SH201 is a combination indicating a small hit game. It is displayed. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 has read, for example, an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol 020SH200 (and the small symbol 020SH201) from the effect control pattern, or the main In response to receiving a command from the substrate 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol 020SH200 should be stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol 020SH200, which is the display result of the decorative symbol 020SH200, is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 11-9 (C) shows a screen during the small hit game in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small hit game state, when there is a prize in the special winning opening, the image display device 5 displays a winning effect image 020SH203 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls). Further, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 shows a number added by 10 balls as compared with (B) of FIG. 11-9.

FIG. 11-9 (D) shows a screen at the time of winning the special winning opening of the second ball during the small hit game. In the small hit game state, when the second special winning opening is won, the image display device 5 further displays a winning effect image 020SH203 (two images in total) indicating the number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls). Is displayed. Further, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 shows a number added by 10 balls as compared with (C) of FIG. 11-9. The same applies to the third and subsequent balls, and when there is a prize in the special winning opening, the winning effect image 020SH203 is additionally displayed on the image display device 5.

In displaying the screens shown in (C) and (D), if the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening winning designation command (effect control command) and the second KT state flag is set (that is,). , High probability / in the second KT state), 10 is added to the value of the prize ball counter, and the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed on the image display device 5. When the small hit game is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E), and the next variable display is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when it is determined that the small hit game is to be executed in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode, the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the small symbol 020SH201 showing the small hit are stopped and displayed. During the small hit game, the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed according to the winning of the special winning opening. That is, in the high probability / second KT state, when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit notification image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203 corresponding to the control of the small hit game state are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small hit game in the small hit RUSH mode.

(Example of transition of suggestion production in chance time mode)
Next, an example of the suggestion effect in the chance time mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13. In addition, in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during the chance time mode (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state) is shown. Shown. In the description of FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the same contents as those described with reference to FIGS. 11-9 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

(An example of the transition of the effect that changes the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect transition that changes the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a transition of the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. 11-10 and 11-11 (A) to (E) show similar screens.

(A) of FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11 show a variable display in the chance time mode. Specifically, the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small symbol 020SH201 are variably displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the image display device 5 displays an active display 020SH205 and a hold display 020SH206 as variable display compatible displays. In the chance time mode, only the small symbol 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 020SH200. In (A), the variable display compatible display all show a normal display mode (for example, "ash").

In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a display result and a variation pattern (for example, the second variation pattern # 11 in FIG. 10-8) specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11. , Or, based on the second variation pattern # 26) of FIG. 10-9 and the game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. Further, in displaying the variable display compatible display, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, the display mode of the variable display compatible display based on the determination result of the look-ahead notice effect, and is variable in the display mode according to the result of the determination. Display correspondence Display the display. In the screen shown in (A), when the variable display stop timing is reached, the screen transitions to the screen in (B).

11-10 and 11-11 (B) show a screen at the time of suspension of fluctuation when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit in the small hit determination in the chance time mode. Specifically, although the image display device 5 is determined to be a small hit, a prize ball cannot be expected. Therefore, both the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are symbols showing a combination of loss. The stop display is displayed at, and the small hit notification image 020SH202 (see (B) in FIG. 11-10) is not displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

11-10 and 11-11 (C) show a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (fanning effect 1: step 1). Specifically, in the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 suggesting that the suggestion effect (hold change suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect, and probability change suggestion effect) may be performed. Is displayed. The first fanning effect image 020SH211 is, for example, an image showing that a character appears. Further, the decorative symbol 020SH200 is erased, and the small hit notification image 020SH202 is stopped and displayed as it is with a symbol indicating a combination of loss. In the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the special winning opening is rarely won. Further, even if the special winning opening is won in the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9 (C) is not displayed.

11-10 and 11-11 (D) show a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (fanning effect 2: step 2). Specifically, the image display device 5 can perform a suggestion effect (one of a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect) rather than the fanning effect 1 of (C). The second fanning effect image 020SH212 suggesting that there is a sex is displayed. The second fanning effect image 020SH212 is an image developed from the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and is, for example, an image in which the character operates (an image in which the character wields a sword).

11-10 and 11-11 (E) show a hold change suggestion effect, and specifically, a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (action effect: step 3). Specifically, the action effect image 020SH213 is displayed on the image display device 5. The action effect image 020SH213 is an image obtained by developing the second fanning effect image 020SH212, for example, an image in which the character acts on the hold display 020SH206 (the sword touches the hold display 020SH206).

FIG. 11-10 (F) shows a change in the hold display (step 4) in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the image display device 5, at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 when the variable display of the decorative symbol 020SH200 is started, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes to the display mode of high expectation (for example, from "ash"). (Changed to "blue") is displayed. That is, as shown in (E), the action effect image 020SH213 acts on the hold display 020SH206 in the small hit game state, so that the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes in (F) of FIG. 11-10. The change production of is performed. In FIG. 11-10, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 is changed when the next variable display is started after the small hit game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the small hit. During the game (before the start of the next variable display), the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may be changed.

On the other hand, FIG. 11-11 (F) shows a Gase effect (Gase hold change suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the hold display in the chance time mode does not change. Specifically, it shows a case where the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 does not change to the display mode of high expectation even at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 when the variable display of the decorative symbol 020SH200 is started. That is, although the action effect image 020SH213 (image showing the bow and arrow) acted on the hold display 020SH206 in the small hit game state as shown in (E), the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 in (F) of FIG. 11-11. Will not change (the production will not develop).

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode in the feature unit 020SH, the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 Are all stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of losses, and it is possible to execute a hold change suggestion effect (display of the action effect image 020SH213) that suggests a content advantageous to the player during the small hit game. In addition, it is possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold display by the hold change suggestion effect or the Gase hold change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, and the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be expected. The controlled period can be effectively utilized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, in FIG. 11-11 (C), although the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) and the action effect image 020SH213 shown in (E) are not displayed. May be done. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the action effect image 020SH213 is not displayed. Further, in (E), there is a case where the action effect image 020SH213 does not act on the hold display 020SH206 (for example, an effect of displaying an image in which the character flies at the upper left of the image display device 5).

In addition, a plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) of the first fanning effect image 020SH211, the second fanning effect image 020SH212, and the action effect image 020SH213. The ease of changing the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may differ depending on the display mode of. Specifically, for each image, prepare a display mode that is easily determined when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes, and a display mode that is easy to determine when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 does not change. Just do it. Further, the display mode of the hold display 020SH 206 may be changed without displaying the action effect image 020SH213, that is, without performing the hold change suggestion effect.

(Example of transition of setting value suggestion effect in chance time mode)
FIG. 11-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a set value suggestion effect in the chance time mode. Since (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-12 are the same as (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 11-12 (E) shows a screen (set value suggestion effect) during the small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a set value suggestion image 020SH220 whose background image indicates night. The background image at night in the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is an image suggesting that the set value is 4 or more (see (B) in FIG. 11-7).

FIG. 11-12 (F) shows that the small hit game has ended and the next variable display has been performed. In the set value suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-12, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed within the period controlled by the small hit game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following Even after the start of the variable display, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 may be continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-12, in the feature unit 020SH, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, both the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are lost. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the combination, and the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed during the small hit game. That is, in the feature unit 020SH, when the small hit game state is controlled in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the set value suggestion effect (set value suggestion) suggesting the content advantageous to the player. Image 020SH220 display) can be executed. By the set value suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-12, the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the set value suggestion effect, there is a case where the disappointment effect is performed in the same manner as the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in FIG. 11-12 (C), although the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) may not be displayed. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is not displayed.

In addition, a plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) of the first fanning effect image 020SH211, the second fanning effect image 020SH212, and the action effect image 020SH213. The ease with which the set value suggestion effect is executed may differ depending on the display mode of. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the set value suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is easily determined when the set value suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

(An example of the transition of the probability change suggestion effect in the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a probability change suggestion effect in the chance time mode. Since (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-13 are the same as (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10, the description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 11-13 (E) shows a screen (probability change suggestion effect) during a small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear. The probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear is an image showing that there is a high possibility that the three characters are controlled in a high probability state (see (C) in FIG. 11-7).

FIG. 11-13 (F) shows that the small hit game has ended and the next variable display has been performed. In the probability variation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed within the period controlled by the small hit game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following variable display is performed. The probability change suggestion image 020SH230 may be continuously displayed even after the start of.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the feature unit 020SH, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, both the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are lost. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the combination, and the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed during the small hit game. That is, in the feature unit 020SH, when controlled to the small hit gaming state in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the probability variation suggestion effect (probability variation suggestion image 020SH230) suggesting the content advantageous to the player. Display) can be executed. By the probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the probabilistic change suggestion effect, there is a case where the disappointment effect is performed in the same manner as the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in FIG. 11-13 (C), although the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) may not be displayed. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is not displayed.

In addition, a plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) of the first fanning effect image 020SH211, the second fanning effect image 020SH212, and the action effect image 020SH213. The ease with which the probabilistic incitement effect is executed may differ depending on the display mode of. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

Each suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13 can improve the interest in the small hit game state in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the chance time mode in which the variable display of 1.5 seconds is continuously executed, the small hit game is executed even if the small hit game exceeding 1.8 seconds is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize this, and it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the game may have stopped during the small hit game in the first KT state, and in the first KT state, a light game (with a good tempo). , A pleasant game) can be realized.

(About the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-14, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit game and the execution timing of various suggestion effects will be described. FIG. 11-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects. FIG. 11-14 shows a variable display of a special symbol (second special symbol) determined to be a small hit in the small hit determination, and a small hit game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 17) executed thereafter. ..

First, the variable display of the special symbol and the small hit game will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, in the first KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. The variable display time (variation time) of the second special symbol in the first KT state is 1 second if the second reserved storage number is "1 or more" (second variation pattern # 11 in FIG. 10-8, or FIG. 10). -9 is the second fluctuation pattern # 26), and if the second reserved storage number is “0”, it is 5 seconds (the second fluctuation pattern # 10 in FIG. 10-8 or the second in FIG. 10-9). Fluctuation pattern # 25). When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol (for example, a small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed until the symbol confirmation period (also referred to as the symbol confirmation period) of 0.5 seconds elapses.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses, it is controlled to the small hit game state. The small hit game state includes a fanfare period of 0.1 seconds, a predetermined opening period, and a small hit ending period. Specifically, in the small hit game state, after the small hit fanfare period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, and when a predetermined opening period (for example, 1.8 seconds) elapses, a special The variable winning ball device 17 closes and shifts to the small hit ending period. When the small hit ending period elapses, the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the execution timing of the hold change suggestion effect (including the Gase hold change suggestion effect) will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, when the small hit fanfare period elapses and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 comes, the first fanning effect (display of the first fanning effect image 020SH211 in FIG. 11-10), the second A fanning effect (display of the second fanning effect image 020SH212) and an action effect (display of an image in which the action effect image 020SH213 is in contact with the hold display 020SH206) are performed. Then, when the hold display is changed (in the case of the hold change suggestion effect), the hold display changes at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (the timing of the hold shift). On the other hand, in the case of the Gase hold change suggestion effect, the hold display does not change at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (the timing of the hold shift), and the current display mode of the hold display is maintained.

As described above, in the feature unit 020SH, the small hit game, the variable display, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display are performed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the transition from the small hit game state to the state in which the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Next, the set value suggestion effect and the probability change suggestion effect will be described. In the description of FIGS. 11-14, the set value suggestion effect and the probability change suggestion effect are referred to as “set value suggestion effect, etc.”. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, when the small hit fanfare period elapses and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 comes, the first fanning effect (for example, the display of the first fanning effect image 020SH211 in FIG. 11-12), The second fanning effect (display of the second fanning effect image 020SH212) and the set value suggestion effect (display of the set value suggestion image 020SH220) are performed. The set value suggestion effect and the like are executed until, for example, the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17.

As described above, in the feature unit 020SH, the set value suggestion effect and the like are performed corresponding to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, it is difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is possible to pay attention to the setting value suggestion effect and the like. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins a prize, and it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly. In addition, the period controlled by the small hit game state can be effectively utilized by setting value suggestion effects and the like, and the interest during the small hit game can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 020SH, each suggestion effect is started at the timing of the opening start of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, since each suggestion effect can be started immediately after the transition to the small hit game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The timing at which each suggestion effect is executed may be any timing corresponding to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, and specifically, the timing including the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. Good. For example, the start timing of each suggestion effect is not limited to the timing of opening start of the special variable winning ball device 17, and may be the timing during the small hit fanfare period. As a result, these effects can be started at the earliest timing after the transition to the small hit game state, so that it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed.

Further, the start timing of each suggestion effect may be the timing during the symbol determination period or the timing during the variable display of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the transition from the state in which the variable display is executed to the small hit game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Further, the end timing of the set value suggestion effect and the like is not limited to the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, and may be the timing during the small hit ending period. As a result, these effects can be executed until the end of the small hit game state, so that the period controlled by the small hit game state can be more effectively utilized.

Further, the end timing of each suggestion effect may be the timing during the variable display of the next second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the transition from the small hit game state to the state in which the variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the interest of the game can be improved. Here, I would like to make a concrete supplement on the improvement of interest. In the first KT state, for example, a shortening fluctuation (1 second fluctuation) and a small hit game (decorative symbol is stopped at a lost symbol) are repeatedly executed. If no special effect is performed in the small hit game state, it seems as if the progress of the game is stopped in the small hit game state. Therefore, in the first KT state (high base state), the game does not seem to proceed quickly and lightly, and the player may feel uncomfortable. In addition, the time controlled to the small hit game state in the first KT state may be wasted time for the player.

As described above, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, when the small hit game state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state), it is advantageous for the player. The suggestion effect suggesting the content (for example, any of the hold change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins, the player can be given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the small hit game in the first KT state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Further, since the period in which the small hit game is executed in the first KT state can be effectively utilized, it is possible to suppress that the period is wasted time for the player.

Further, when the small hit game state is controlled in the second KT state, an effect corresponding to the control of the small hit game state (for example, display of the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIGS. 11-9) is displayed. Made feasible. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state and the second KT state.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 020SH is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 020SH to a so-called one-kind-two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine. An example of one specification of a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine will be described below.

In a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko game machine, in a normal state (non-special state: low base state), a variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol game) is mainly executed by left-handed striking. When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the jackpot game is executed.

In the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 6298/65536 (about 1/100). Although the details will be described later, even if the small hit game is executed based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the game ball passes through the specific area (V area) in the special variable winning ball device 17. That is almost unpredictable.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the first starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

In the judgment based on winning the first start winning opening, since the small hit probability is constant, the set values "1" to "6" are set by making the loss probability different according to the set values "1" to "6". The jackpot probability according to "6" can be set.

For example, in the first special figure game, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the game shifts to a special state (for example, a time saving state) after the jackpot game is executed according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). .. When the jackpot game is executed, depending on the jackpot type, it may return to the normal state, for example, without shifting to the special state.

In the special state, for example, the game (mainly the second special figure game) is performed by right-handed striking aiming at the gate arranged on the right side of the game area and the second start winning opening. The special state is a high-base state, and specifically, the following controls (1) to (4) are performed.
(1) Control is performed to make the probability of hitting a normal figure higher than in the normal state.
(2) Control is performed to make the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory longer than the normal state.
(3) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal map game from the normal state.
(4) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol from the normal state.
This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, and the frequency with which the second special figure game is executed increases. The special state is controlled, for example, until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the above controls (1) to (4) are not performed. Even if the player hits right in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal figure is low, the opening time of the normal electric accessory is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal figure game is long, so the second start winning opening You can hardly expect to win a prize.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 62896/65536 (about 96/100). It should be noted that the small hit probability in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening and the small hit probability in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening are different.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the second starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

In the judgment based on winning the second start winning opening, since the small hit probability is constant, the set values "1" to "6" are set by making the loss probability different according to the set values "1" to "6". The jackpot probability according to "6" can be set.

As described above, since the small hit probability is 96/100 in the judgment based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit symbol is derived in the variable display in the special state (mainly the second special figure game). Easy to display. In the small hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 arranged on the right side of the game area is opened, the game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 (small hit attacker), and the special variable winning ball device 17 is used. When passing through the provided specific area (so-called V area), the big hit game is executed. In the small hit game state in the special state, since the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is longer than in the normal state, it is easy to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is easy to pass through the V region. It has become.

In the special state (mainly the second special figure game), when the game ball passes through the V region under the control of the small hit game state before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, the special state is terminated. A jackpot game is executed. Further, in the special state, even if it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed), the special state is similarly terminated. , The jackpot game is executed. Then, when the jackpot game is executed, it is controlled to the special state again according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). In this way, by executing the jackpot game in a special state (by the consecutive villas), the player can expect many prize balls.

On the other hand, in the special state, even if the jackpot game is executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, depending on the jackpot type, the game shifts to the normal state without being controlled by the special state. In some cases. Further, in the special state, even when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the normal state is entered. Specifically, in the special state, if the big hit game is not executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (for example, although the game ball is controlled to the small hit game state, the game ball wins a special variable prize. When the ball device 17 does not win a prize, does not pass through the V region, or the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed), the normal state is entered. As a result, the control of the special state ends, and the consecutive villa ends. Even in a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine, for example, a variable display of a special symbol is not performed in the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

In such a one-type and two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine, when the small hit game state is controlled in a special state, a special effect corresponding to the control of the small hit game state (special state) (for example, "small hit attacker") (Display the image of "Aim at the special variable winning ball device 17)!") Can be executed. As a result, in the small hit game in the special state, the player can expect a big hit.

Further, in the variable display of the first special figure game in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), the small hit symbol may be derived and displayed (small hit probability: about 1/100). In the small hit game in the normal state, the game is performed by hitting left, and since the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged in the right side area, it is difficult to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17. .. Even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17 because the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short, and even if a winning is made in the special variable winning ball device 17, V Since it is difficult to pass through the region, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will pass through the V region.

In the first modification, in such a one-kind two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine, when the small hit gaming state (special state) is controlled in the normal state (non-special state), the suggestion effect related to the feature unit 020SH is produced. It may be feasible. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests content that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, or the like. The suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination is, for example, a hold change suggestion effect, but is not limited to this, and an effect suggesting that the hold storage information having a high expectation of a big hit is stored (for example,). It may be a display of a background image, a character image, or the like with a high degree of expectation).

Even in the special state, when the first hold storage is stored, the small hit symbol may be derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special figure game. In this case, if the small hit game is configured to be difficult to pass through the V region, the suggestion effect related to the feature unit 020SH may be executed when controlled by the small hit game.

According to the first modification, even if the small hit game in the normal state in which the game ball hardly wins is executed, the player can be given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the small in the normal state. The hit game can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Therefore, according to the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the normal state in the one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine of the one-to-two mixed type is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, and may have other specifications as long as the small hit game in a normal state in which the game ball hardly wins is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the feature unit 020SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing a game (a pachinko gaming machine of a mixed type of one type and two types), in which a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state and identification information (for example, a special symbol) are variably displayed and displayed. The game state control means includes a variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the result and an effect execution means, and the game state control means has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state that is different from the advantageous state. (For example, a small hit gaming state), a non-special state (for example, a normal state), and a special state that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state (special state according to the modification 1 of the feature unit 020SH: for example. , Time saving state), the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state. , A special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, displaying an image of "Aim for a small hit attacker (special variable winning ball device 17)!") Can be executed, and the special state is set in the non-special state. When controlled, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests content that is advantageous to the player (for example, a suggestion effect based on the judgment result of the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, etc.). is there.

(Modification example 2 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, the configuration in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened once at the time of a small hit has been described. In the second modification, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the special variable winning ball device 17 may be opened a plurality of times according to the small hit type.

Specifically, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 17 is 1.8 seconds × 1 time in the case of the small hit C having the longest opening time (see FIG. 10-14), but is not limited to this. The opening pattern may be, for example, when the opening time is the longest, the total opening time may be 1.8 seconds or less, and may be 0.9 seconds × 2 times or 0.2 seconds × 9 times. In addition, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect of the content according to the opening pattern. Specifically, for example, a suggestion effect corresponding to opening of 0.9 seconds × 2 times may be executed. In this way, even if the opening pattern is opened a plurality of times, it is possible to make it difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 and to pay attention to each suggestion effect by performing the suggestion effect according to the opening pattern. ..

(Modification example 3 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, the configuration in which the suggestion effect can be executed in the first KT state has been described. In the third modification, the suggestion effect may be executed in the normal state (low probability / low base state) instead of or in addition to such a configuration.

For example, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed by winning the first start winning opening, but the small hit probability in the small hit determination in this case is As shown in FIG. 10-3, it is "6298/65536" (about 10%). The type of small hit by winning the first start winning opening is small hit A (opening time: 0.2 seconds). In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit (small hit A) is executed, the non-reach lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the player does not have excessive expectations. I have to.

Therefore, in the modification example 3, the suggestion effect may be executed when the small hit game state is controlled in the normal state. In addition, in order to secure the time to execute the suggestion effect, the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be set long. As a result, the effect in the small hit game in the normal state can be made useful for the player. Therefore, the period controlled by the small hit game in the normal state can be effectively utilized, and the interest of the small hit game in the normal state can be improved.

After shifting from the low probability / high base state to the normal state, the variable display based on the second hold storage may be executed. Specifically, immediately after the transition from the low probability / high base state to the normal state, variable display based on the second reserved storage stored in the low probability / high base state before the transition may be executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display based on the second hold memory in the normal state. Then, when the small hit game is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the period controlled by the small hit game state, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is extended by the period controlled in the small hit game state. In the third modification, it is also possible to perform a suggestion effect during the period when the variable display of the first special symbol is extended. That is, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect in the normal state (low probability / low base state). As a result, the period during which the variable display of the first special symbol is extended can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 020SH, a configuration for executing a pending change suggestion effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit has been described as a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination. In the modified example 4, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestion effect based on the judgment result of the look-ahead determination, a suggestion effect suggesting the jackpot type when it is determined to be a jackpot. May be feasible.

For example, when the hold memory determined to be a 2R normal big hit is stored during the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state, that is, from the high probability / first KT state to the low probability / first KT state. If it is known that the transition will occur, it may be possible to perform a disappointing effect (disappointing effect) for the player during the small hit game. Specifically, for example, in a small hit game before the variable display based on the hold memory determined to be a 2R normal big hit is started, the background image is darkened, or the background image is a skull and crossbones image. You may perform an effect such as displaying an effect image. Further, in this case, for example, a hold change suggestion effect may be performed on the hold memory of the target to change the hold display to a hold display with a skull and crossbones image.

On the other hand, when the hold memory determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is stored during the small hit game in the high probability / 1st KT state or the low probability / 1st KT state, that is, the high probability / When it is known that the state shifts from the first KT state or the low probability / first KT state to the second KT state, it may be possible to execute a production (high expectation degree production) that is pleasing to the player during the small hit game. Specifically, for example, in a small hit game before the variable display based on the hold memory determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is started, the background image is displayed brightly (rainbow-colored). , An effect such as displaying an image of an angel mark or an effect image on the background image may be performed. Further, in this case, for example, a hold change suggestion effect may be performed on the hold memory of the target to change the hold display to a hold display with an image of an angel mark.

In addition, if a plurality of small hit games are executed before the variable display corresponding to the hold memory of the target for which the look-ahead is determined is executed, the same suggestion effect is produced in the multiple small hit games (unfortunately). The effect or high expectation effect) may be performed, that is, the suggestion effect may be performed a plurality of times. Further, if the variable display is executed a plurality of times before the variable display corresponding to the target hold memory is executed, the same suggestion is given not only in the small hit game state but also in the variable display a plurality of times. You may perform the production. That is, such a suggestion effect may be continuously executed until the variable display based on the hold storage of the pre-reading determined target is started.

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, the ratio for determining that the display mode of the hold display is changed during the variable display in FIG. 11-8 (“change determination ratio during variable display” in the description of the modified example 5”. ) Was explained as the same ratio as the determination ratio (decision ratio of the hold change suggestion effect) for changing the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game. In the modified example 5, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect may be different ratios.

For example, the decision rate of the pending change suggestion effect may be higher than the change decision rate during the variable display. As a result, it is easier to change the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect than the change of the hold display during the variable display, and the period controlled by the small hit game state can be effectively utilized.

Further, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the hold change suggestion effect may be different depending on the result of the look-ahead determination (determination of the jackpot) for the target hold storage information. For example, when it is determined by the look-ahead judgment that a big hit is to be executed, the decision rate of the hold change suggestion effect is set to be higher than the change decision rate during the variable display, while the look-ahead judgment determines that the jackpot is lost. In this case, the decision rate of the pending change suggestion effect may be lower than the change decision rate during the variable display. As a result, the change in the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect can be made to have a higher degree of expectation than the change in the display mode of the hold display during the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion effect during the small hit game.

In the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state), the hold display may be changed more easily than in other gaming states (normal state or second KT state). That is, the chance time mode may be set as the mode in which the display mode of the hold display is most likely to change. Further, in this case, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect may be higher than the change determination ratio during the variable display. That is, among the effects of changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be most easily executed with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 020SH, the Gase hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game is executed when the final color of the hold memory during the hold display is all gray (FIG. 11-6). 020SHS70: See YES). In the modified example 6, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the Gase hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game is displayed in the hold memory during the hold display, and the final color is a special display other than gray. It may also be feasible when the hold memory determined as the mode is stored.

In this case, the hold storage determined to have a gray final color may be easier to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect than the hold memory determined to be the special display mode. As a result, even when the hold memory determined to be the special display mode is stored, the hold memory determined to have the final color of gray can be subjected to the Gase hold change suggestion effect. You can liven up the production during the hit game.

On the contrary, for the hold memory determined to be the special display mode, it may be easier to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect than the hold memory determined to have the display mode whose final color is gray. For example, the hold change suggestion effect may be forcibly executed for the hold memory whose final color is determined to be the special display mode, and the hold change suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, in the active display, the display mode is changed to the final color. As a result, the player's expectation can be intentionally lowered at the hold display stage, and the expectation when the display mode changes at the active display stage can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion production.

(Modification example 7 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect are performed as suggestion effects has been described. In the modification 7, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, an explanatory suggestion effect relating to the progress of the game may be executed as a suggestion effect.

The explanation suggestion effect is, for example, an effect using a character image relating to the progress of the game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the explanation suggestion effect such as "maybe the mode shifts to the normal mode in 50 games?" Or "small hit". An explanation suggestion effect such as "It's about to reach RUSH mode!" And a possibility that it is controlled to a high probability state in the chance mode at the time of the first hit (62% = "56/56 + 35"%: see Fig. 11-1). Is the probability of probability change a little over 60%? "

Here, in the feature unit 020SH, the gaming state is controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states such as a normal state, a high probability / first KT state, a low probability / first KT state, and a second KT state. In addition, since the game state changes, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the content of the game. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the explanatory suggestion effect of the modification example 7, the player can easily grasp the game state and the like that can be shifted after the chance mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification example 8 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 8 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 020SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is controlled to a high probability state until the next jackpot when the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is executed will be described. did. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 020SH to a gaming machine (for example, a so-called ST machine) that is controlled to a high probability state until a predetermined number of times elapses. Here, a specification example of the pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine will be described.

For example, in the ST machine, when the probability variation jackpot is executed, it is controlled to a high probability state until the variable display of the specified number of times (ST number of times) is executed, and when the variable display of the specified number of times is executed, it is high. It shifts from the probability state to the low probability state.

Further, when the probability variation jackpot is executed, it is controlled to a high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the probability variation jackpot game. The period controlled to the high probability / first KT state (variable display number) is the period according to the probability variation jackpot symbol (transition variation number). When the number of transition fluctuations is executed after being controlled to the high probability / first KT state, the transition from the high base state (high probability / first KT state) to the low base state (second KT state) is performed. The number of transition fluctuations is, for example, less than the number of STs.

As a result, it becomes possible to control in the second KT state from the elapse of the number of transition fluctuations to the elapse of the number of STs, that is, the small hit game in which a winning can be expected is executed. If the jackpot is not won even once before the variable display of the ST number is executed in the second KT state, the variable display of the ST number is executed to return to the normal state. Here, when the small hit game state is controlled in the second KT state, the effect corresponding to the control of the small hit game state (for example, the display of the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIGS. 11-9). To be executable.

Further, in the ST machine, when the normal jackpot symbol is executed, it is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the normal jackpot game. The period controlled to the low probability / first KT state (variable display number) is usually a period corresponding to the jackpot symbol (transition fluctuation number). When the number of transition fluctuations is executed after being controlled to the low probability / first KT state, the state shifts from the high base state (low probability / first KT state) to the low base state (normal state).

In the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state, a common effect (for example, Chantime mode) may be executed. In the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is difficult for the game ball to win the special variable winning ball device 17, that is, the winning ball cannot be expected.

In the modified example 8, when the small hit game state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state) in the ST machine, a suggestion effect suggesting an advantageous content for the player. (For example, any of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) may be made executable.

According to the modified example 8, even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed in the ST machine, the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly is given by executing the suggestion effect. It can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the first KT state. In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state. The pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, and may have other specifications as long as a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins is executed.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 020SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature unit 020SH, a pachinko gaming machine is known in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time and small hits are frequently generated in a probabilistic gaming state (for example). , JP-A-2018-033787.). However, when a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins is executed, the variable display is not performed during this period, which may give the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. is there. Specifically, for example, if a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed each time in the small hit game state, and the game proceeds smoothly. There is a risk of giving the player the impression that it is not. For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

(Means D1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means D1 according to the feature unit 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and a gaming state control for controlling the gaming state. The means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) for executing steps S120 to S128 shown in FIG. 6) and the identification information (for example, a special symbol) are variably displayed and displayed. A variable display executing means for deriving and displaying the result (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) shown in FIG. 4) and an effect executing means (for example, an effect). The gaming state control means includes a control CPU 120), and the game state control means has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a non-special state (first KT state) and a special state (for example, a second KT state) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state, and the advantageous state and the special state are variable. When the display is not performed and the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, a small hit shown in FIG. 10-9). The broadcast image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed, and when controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect is different from the special effect and is advantageous to the player. (For example, the pending change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-11 (E)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player can be given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, that is, The small hit game in the non-special state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state by the suggestion effect.

(Means D2)
Further, as the game machine of the means D2 related to the feature unit 020SH, in the game machine described in the means D1, the effect executing means corresponds to the variable display of the identification information, and the decoration identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) is displayed. Variable display is possible, and when the special state is controlled in the special state, the display result of the decoration identification information is a special display result (for example, a definite symbol "1," which is a combination indicating a small hit game. 3,5 ") is displayed, and when the special state is controlled in the non-special state, the display result of the decoration identification information is a predetermined display result different from the special display result (combination of decorative symbols indicating loss). Is displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, since it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening during the small hit game, the predetermined display result (for example, the lost symbol) is forcibly stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being overly expected.

(Means D3)
Further, as the game machine of the means D3 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the game machine described in the means D1 or the means D2, the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state for the variable display which has not been started yet. The pre-start determination means for determining (for example, pre-reading determination) whether or not the display result is shown is provided, and the effect execution means provides the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 11-) to make a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. The pending change suggestion effect shown in 10 (E)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, so that the expectation for the reserved memory can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D4)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D4 according to the feature unit 020SH, the gaming machine described in any one of the means 1D to the means D3 is provided with a holding storage means for storing information related to the variable display as the holding storage information, and the effect executing means. Displays the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means as a hold display (for example, hold display 020SH206 shown in FIG. 11-10 (A)), and acts on the hold display in the suggestion effect. The action effect (for example, the action effect image 020SH213 shown in FIG. 11-10 (E)) can be executed, and when the display mode of the hold display changes, when the display mode of the hold display does not change, and when the display mode of the hold display does not change. There is.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a series of effects including an action effect and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, it is possible to pay attention to the hold display and increase the expectation for the hold memory. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D5)
Further, as the game machine of the means D5 according to the feature unit 020SH, the game machine described in any one of the means D1 to the means D4 is set to one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player. The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 shown in FIG. 11-12 (E)) that gives a suggestion about the setting means.

According to such a configuration, in the small hit game in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player can guess the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D6)
Further, in the game machine according to any one of means D1 to D5 as the game machine of the means D6 according to the feature unit 020SH, the non-special state includes the first non-special state (for example, non-probability change state: low probability). / 1st KT state) and 2nd non-special state (for example, probabilistic state: high probability / 1st KT state) which is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the 1st non-special state. , The common effect (chance time mode) can be executed when the first non-special state is controlled and when the second non-special state is controlled, and the suggestion effect is the first non-special state. 2 It is suggested that the state is controlled to a non-special state (for example, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-13).

According to such a configuration, the common effect is executed when controlled by either the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, and the probability change suggestion effect is performed in the small hit game in the Chantime mode. Since it is feasible, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not the player is in the probabilistic state in the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D7)
Further, in the game machine described in any one of means D1 to D6 as the game machine of the means D7 according to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means has a plurality of types of suggestive effects (for example, different modes) as the suggestive effects. , The odd number setting suggestion, the even number setting suggestion, and the setting value 4 or more suggestion shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) can be executed, and the player depends on which type of the suggestion effect is executed. The advantages of the content suggested for are different.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion effect by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects, so that it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect from becoming a monotonous effect. Further, since the advantage level differs depending on the suggestion effect, the degree of attention of the player can be different depending on the suggestion effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D8)
Further, in the game machine described in any one of means D1 to D7 as the game machine of the means D8 according to the feature unit 020SH, the variable display executing means can change the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol). The first state in which the display and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and the game medium easily passes through the start area (for example, the second start winning opening). A variable first variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 1) is provided in the second state in which the game medium is difficult to pass through the starting region, and the gaming state controlling means is the first. The 1 variable winning means can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, the first KT state) that easily changes to the first state, and the effect executing means is put into the special state (for example, a small hit game state) in the predetermined state. The suggestion effect can be executed when controlled.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the first The small hit game in the 1KT state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state.

(Means D9)
Further, as the game machine of the means D9 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the game machine described in any one of the means D1 to the means D8, the game ball is easy to win (open state) and the game ball is difficult to win. A second variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) that can be changed is provided in a winning difficult state (closed state), and the second variable winning means is said to win in the special state. The effect execution means can change to an easy state, and the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the easy winning state (for example, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17). To do.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is possible to pay attention to the suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins a prize, and it is possible to prevent the small hit game from deteriorating the interest of the game.

(Means D10)
Further, in the game machine described in any one of means D1 to D9 as the game machine of the means D10 according to the feature unit 020SH, the game state control means has a specific area (for example, a special) in the game medium in the special state. It is possible to control the advantageous state based on passing through a specific region (so-called V region) in the variable winning ball device 17.

According to such a configuration, even if a small hit game in a normal state (non-special state) in which a game ball hardly wins is executed in a pachinko game machine in which the feature unit 020SH is a kind and two types mixed type, the game is smoothly played. It is possible to give the player the impression that is progressing, that is, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the normal state. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the normal state.

(Means D11)
Further, in the game machine described in any one of means D1 to D10 as the game machine of the means D11 related to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the game medium. Corresponds to the passage of the special area of the game medium based on the fact that has passed through the special area (for example, the discharge area) (for example, the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening). The predetermined effect (for example, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-11 (C)) can be executed, and when the special state is controlled in the non-special state, the game medium passes through the special area. Regardless of whether or not, the predetermined effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, in the second KT state, the player can be encouraged to win a prize in the special variable winning opening, and the interest in the second KT state can be improved. On the other hand, in the small hit game in the first KT state, although the game ball may rarely win a prize in the special variable winning opening, in order to prevent the predetermined effect from being executed, the prize at the time of the small hit in the first KT state is given. It is possible to prevent the player from expecting it.

(Explanation of feature section 022SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 022SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 022SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 022SH includes a gaming state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, and the pre-start determination means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect executing means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can be controlled into an advantageous state, a special state, and a special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small hit gaming state.

The special state is a state in which the game value is easily given by the special state, for example, the second KT state (high probability / low base state). The second KT state is a game state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a game state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. The first KT state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state) is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, but it is also difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening. .. That is, the first KT state is a state in which the game value is hardly given by the special state.

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 022SH, it is possible to control the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and it is possible to control the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. The advantageous game referred to here is a big hit that shifts to the second KT state after the end of the big hit game state. The game state control means can be controlled to the second KT state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state again after being controlled to the second KT state.

The effect executing means controls the effect mode of the small hit RUSH mode in the second KT state. In the second KT state, it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, and is not controlled to any other effect mode. The small hit RUSH mode is also an effect mode that is controlled only in the second KT state. That is, when the small hit RUSH mode is controlled, it is always controlled to the second KT state.

When the effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a plurality of states in which the game value can be given as the state after being controlled to the advantageous state. The time when it is controlled to the advantageous state is the time when it is controlled by this big hit game. The states in which the game value can be given are the second KT state and the next big hit game state. The specific display is a display corresponding to the subsequent existence (occurrence) of the second KT state and the next big hit game state.

For example, the specific display is an image (hereinafter, referred to as “bonus rush icon”) corresponding to the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) and the next big hit game state. Specifically, the specific display includes a plurality of icon images corresponding to the current jackpot, an icon image corresponding to the subsequent second KT state, and an icon image corresponding to the next jackpot to be won in the second KT state. It consists of an icon image.

The display mode of the bonus rush icon may be any shape such as a circle, a square, or a triangle, or may be a display mode with characters or symbols. Each icon image of the bonus rush icon is an image showing a blank when the corresponding state (game) is not completed, and changes to an image with a predetermined color when the corresponding state is completed. The blank icon image corresponding to the current jackpot, the blank icon image corresponding to the second KT state, and the blank icon image corresponding to the next jackpot, which constitute the bonus rush icon, all have the same display mode. Is displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means can change the display mode of the specific display according to the controlled state among the states including the advantageous state and the plurality of states to which the game value can be given. Is. For example, when the current jackpot is completed, the effect executing means changes a predetermined display mode of the blank icon image corresponding to the current jackpot. Specifically, the effect executing means changes the display mode to indicate a state in which the blank bonus rush icon is colored in red and the blank is filled. The change in the display mode is not limited to filling in the blanks by coloring, and for example, characters such as "done" may be added to the corresponding icon, or the shape of the corresponding icon may be changed. ..

Here, the timing for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon will be described. For example, in the case of a bonus rush icon corresponding to a big hit, the display mode is changed during the ending period of the big hit. However, the timing for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the big hit is not limited to these, and may be during the round game (for example, the final round). Further, in the case of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state, the display mode is changed, for example, during the big hit fanfare period. However, the timing for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state is not limited to these, and may be during the round game (for example, the first round).

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, there are a plurality of different types of display modes for the specific display. The effect executing means can display a specific display of a display mode corresponding to a controlled state among a state including an advantageous state and a plurality of states to which a game value can be given. Specifically, when the jackpot is completed, the effect executing means changes the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the jackpot to a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the jackpot.

Further, when the second KT state ends, the effect executing means displays a display mode (for example, indicating that the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state is controlled to the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). , Yellow).

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means has a specific display of a specific mode corresponding to the controlled advantageous state and a specific display of the predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states to which the game value can be given. It can be displayed. The specific display of the specific mode is, for example, an icon image in which red or yellow is filled. The specific display of the predetermined mode is, for example, a blank icon image. The effect executing means can display a bonus rush icon including an icon image in a state where the red color is filled and a blank icon image.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means can display the specific display over a plurality of states among the states including the advantageous state and the plurality of states to which the game value can be given. Specifically, the effect executing means is specified and displayed over the current jackpot game state, the second KT state after the current jackpot, and the next jackpot game state, that is, across a plurality of game states. Can be displayed. In addition, the effect executing means can always display a specific display, such as during variable display, during symbol stop display, while waiting for variable display, during small hit game, and during big hit game.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means can display the game value given in the advantageous state and the game value given in the special state in the advantageous state and the special state. The game value is, for example, a prize ball. Specifically, the production execution means spans the current jackpot game state, the second KT state after the current jackpot, and the next jackpot game state, that is, across a plurality of game states, and is a general prize. The number of balls can be displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, it is suggested that when the effect executing means is controlled to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state, it is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state after the special state. Perform the production. Specifically, in the next big hit game, the effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the second KT state is controlled again after the next big hit game. The suggestive effect is, for example, a success / failure effect that indicates the result of either success or failure, and specifically, a battle effect, a stage-developing effect, or the like.

In addition, the effect executing means displays a specific mode of a predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which the game value can be given as the state after being controlled to the later advantageous state in response to the effect result of the suggestive effect. It can be displayed. For example, when the effect result of the suggestion effect is an effect result indicating success, the effect execution means adds a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon and displays it in the next big hit game. On the other hand, the effect executing means does not add a blank icon image in the next big hit game when the effect result of the suggestion effect is an effect result indicating failure.

For example, the effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect within the same round (for example, in the fifth round), add a blank icon image, and display the effect. However, the effect executing means may execute the suggestion effect over a plurality of rounds and add a blank icon image. For example, the suggestion effect may be executed in the 5th round, and the icon image may be added in the 6th round. Further, the effect executing means may execute the suggestion effect over a plurality of rounds.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, a common number of round games are executed in the advantageous state before being controlled to the special state and the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. That is, the same number of round games are executed between the current jackpot and the next jackpot. The effect executing means can display a specific display of a common display mode when it is controlled to the advantageous state this time and when it is controlled to the advantageous state later. Specifically, the effect executing means displays the icon image corresponding to each of the current jackpot and the next jackpot in a common display mode in red.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. Specifically, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel. The game state control means can control the advantageous state when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. The specific display result is, for example, a display result (big hit symbol) indicating a big hit. Therefore, the game state control means controls the game state to the big hit game state when the display result indicating the big hit is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player than the variable display of the first identification information. For example, in the feature unit 022SH, the jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol is the jackpot that shifts to the second KT state after the end of the jackpot game state, or the number of rounds, than the jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol. It is easy to carry out big hits with many.

When the effect executing means is controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information, if the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed. Erase. Since the specific display is mainly displayed in the second KT state in which the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variable display of the first identification information during the display of the specific display. It is irregular.

Here, as a result of displaying the variable display of the first identification information, when the jackpot that shifts to the second KT state is derived and displayed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific display is not deleted. In other words, the effect executing means deletes the specific display only when the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is the derivation display of the big hit excluding the big hit that shifts to the second KT state after the end of the big hit game state. I decided to.

Here, the timing for erasing the specific display is, for example, the big hit fanfare period. For example, even when a big hit game based on the variable display of the first identification information is performed, since the control of the second KT state is completed by this big hit (the small hit RUSH mode is completed), the icon image is displayed during the fanfare period. , The display mode indicating that the second KT state has been controlled (for example, yellow) may be changed, and then the bonus rush icon may be erased (during the fanfare period). Further, the timing for erasing the specific display is not limited to the big hit game based on the variable display of the first identification information, and may be during the round game or as the ending period. When erasing the specific display during the round game, for example, a suggestion effect may be performed, an effect result indicating failure may be displayed as the effect result of the suggestion effect, and then the specific display may be deleted.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means can display the specific display before the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, when the variable display this time is a big hit, the effect executing means displays that the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state is controlled to the second KT state during the variable display. It is possible to change the mode (for example, yellow).

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is a display result indicating that the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state for the variable display that has not been started yet. The determination made by the pre-start determination means is, for example, a look-ahead determination, and specifically, is the same as various determinations (big hit determination, big hit type determination, fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) performed when starting the open variable display. It is a judgment of the contents. The determination timing performed by the pre-start determination means is a timing before the timing of performing the various determinations.

The effect executing means can display a specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means. For example, if there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination, the effect execution means has an icon of a bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state before the variable display of the hold memory is started. It is possible to change the image to a display mode (eg, yellow) indicating that it is controlled to the second KT state.

(Regarding the game state and transition of the production mode after the big hit game in the feature unit 022SH)
FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game in the feature unit 022SH. FIG. 12-1 shows that the type of jackpot is different from the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the jackpot game in the feature unit 020SH shown in FIG. 11-1. In the description of FIG. 12-1, the points different from those of FIG. 11-1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the feature unit 022SH, there are five types of jackpots: 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, 6R probability variation jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. There is. The 10R probability variation jackpot A is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability / second KT state after the jackpot game. The 10R probability variation jackpot B and the 6R probability variation jackpot are jackpots that shift to the high probability / first KT state after the jackpot game. The 10R normal jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot are jackpots that shift to the low probability / first KT state after the jackpot game. In the case of a big hit of 10R, the same prize ball can be obtained in any big hit. The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 022SH has specifications that make it easier to obtain more prize balls than the above-mentioned feature unit 020SH.

Next, the ratio at which the type of each jackpot is determined in each game state will be described. For example, in the normal game state, the start winning is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the first special symbol is variably displayed. In the jackpot type determination based on the starting prize to the first starting winning slot (that is, in the normal gaming state), the ratio of 6R normal jackpot is 35%, 6R probability variation jackpot is 30%, and 10R probability variation jackpot A is 35%, respectively. It is determined.

On the other hand, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the high probability / 1st KT state, and the low probability / 2nd KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the 2nd starting winning opening, and the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is performed. Will be. In the jackpot type determination based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening (that is, in the low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, and low probability / second KT state), 10R normal jackpot is 35%, 10R. The probability variation jackpot B is 15%, and the probability variation jackpot A is 50%. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 022SH has a higher ratio of being determined to be the 10R probability variation jackpot A than the above-mentioned feature unit 020SH, so that the specifications are such that more prize balls can be easily obtained. There is.

Further, a common effect is executed during the jackpot game depending on whether the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot B is executed or the jackpot game based on the 10R normal jackpot is executed. Specifically, a combination of common decorative symbols is derived and displayed for the 10R probability variation jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, and a common jackpot effect is executed even during each jackpot game. Then, after the big hit game, it is controlled to the common Chantime mode.

As a result, the player cannot determine the type of jackpot executed between the 10R probability variation jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, and the gaming state controlled by the jackpot game (high probability / high base state and low probability / It is possible to prevent the player from discriminating even in any of the high base states). Therefore, in the feature unit 022SH, the player can control the game state regardless of which mode the Chantime mode is started from, not limited to the so-called first hit, which is the transition from the normal mode to the Chantime mode. Can be made indistinguishable.

(About the jackpot type judgment table of the feature unit 022SH)
FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot type determination table of the feature unit 022SH. FIG. 12-2 (A) is a jackpot type determination table when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. FIG. 12-2 (B) is a jackpot type determination table when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 12-2, there are three types of jackpots when executing the variable display of the first special symbol: 10R probability variation jackpot A, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. One of the jackpots will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), the jackpot types when executing the variable display of the second special symbol are 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, and 10R normal jackpot. One of the three types of jackpots will be decided. In both (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2, the rate at which each jackpot type is determined is constant regardless of the set value. Further, in both (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2, the ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot is 65%, and the ratio determined for the normal jackpot is 35%.

Hereinafter, (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2 will be compared and described. The 10R probability variation jackpot A is more likely to be determined in (B) than in (A). Specifically, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is 35% in (A) and 50% in (B). Further, in (A), the 6R probability variation jackpot can be selected and the 10R probability variation jackpot B cannot be selected, but in (B), the 10R probability variation jackpot B can be selected and the 6R probability variation jackpot cannot be selected. Is. Regarding the normal jackpot, in (A), 6R normal jackpot can be selected (10R normal jackpot cannot be selected), and in (B), 10R normal jackpot can be selected (6R normal jackpot cannot be selected). Is. Therefore, the jackpot type determination using (B) is more likely to be determined as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than that of (A). That is, the variable display of the second special symbol is a variable display that is more advantageous to the player than the variable display of the first special symbol.

(Bonus rush icon control process at the start of big hit)
Next, the process of displaying the bonus rush icon at the start of the big hit or changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3. FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the bonus rush icon control process at the start of the big hit. The bonus rush icon control process at the start of the jackpot is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) has been received (step 022SHS11). If the jackpot start designation command has not been received (step 022SHS11: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes as it is.

On the other hand, when the jackpot start designation command is received (step 022SHS11: YES), that is, when the jackpot occurs, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS12). ). In the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS12: YES), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 022SHS14. When it is not the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS12: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13).

When the jackpot is not based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13: NO), that is, when the jackpot is based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is displaying the bonus rush icon. It is determined whether or not there is (step 022SHS14). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS14: NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS15) and ends a series of processes.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS14: YES), the icon image corresponding to the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) of the bonus rush icons is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. A display change effect for changing to the display mode (yellow) indicating that is executed is set (step 022SHS16), and a series of processes is completed.

In step 022SHS13, if it is a big hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17). When the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS17: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17: YES), that is, in the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), for example, control is performed to an irregular big hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol. If so, the effect control CPU 120 erases the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS18) and ends a series of processes.

When the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A is executed by the above-described processing, the bonus rush icon can be displayed during the fanfare period of the jackpot. Further, when the big hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the small hit RUSH mode, the display mode (for example,) indicating that the bonus rush icon is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode during the round game. , Yellow). Further, when an irregular big hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the small hit RUSH mode, the bonus rush icon can be erased during the fanfare period.

(Bonus rush icon control processing during round game)
Next, using FIG. 12-4, a process for adding a blank of the bonus rush icon during the round game will be described. FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the bonus rush icon control process during the round game. The bonus rush icon control process during the round game is a process executed in the big hit middle effect process of S176 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening display command is received (step 022SHS31). When the display command for opening the large winning opening is not received (step 022SHS31: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes as it is. When receiving the display command during opening of the big winning opening (step 022SHS31: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit this time is a big hit when it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. (Step 022SHS32).

When the current big hit is not the big hit when the small hit RUSH mode is controlled (step 022SHS32: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the big hit this time is a big hit when the small hit RUSH mode is controlled (step 022SHS32: YES), it is determined whether or not the round game is the fifth round (step 022SHS33). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is the fifth round based on the value of the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds counted by the CPU 103, and the big winning opening is open. By counting the number of times the display command is received, it may be determined whether or not it is the fifth round.

When the round game is not the fifth round (step 022SHS33: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the round game is the fifth round (step 022SHS33: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34). When the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS34: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS35). In the case of 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS35: YES), the effect control CPU 120 adds and displays a bonus rush icon by setting execution of a success effect as a suggestion effect (step 022SHS36), and a series of processes. To finish. On the other hand, when it is not the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS35: NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the failure effect to be executed as a suggestion effect (step 022SHS37), and ends a series of processes.

By the above-mentioned processing, in the big hit game in the small hit RUSH mode, if the current big hit is the 10R probability variable big hit A, the success effect can be executed as a suggestion effect, while the current big hit is the 10R probability variable big hit B or If it is a 10R normal jackpot, a failure effect can be executed as a suggestion effect.

(Bonus rush icon control processing during the ending period)
Next, the bonus rush icon control process of the process when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed during the ending period will be described with reference to FIG. 12-5. FIG. 12-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the bonus rush icon control process during the ending period. The bonus rush icon control process during the ending period is a process executed in the ending effect process of S177 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes as it is. When the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51: YES), the effect control CPU 120 displays the icon image corresponding to the current jackpot among the bonus rush icons in a display mode (for example, red) indicating the completion of the jackpot. The display change effect to be changed to is set to be executed (step 022SHS52).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS53). When the jackpot this time is the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS53: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the ending effect indicating the transition to the small hit RUSH mode to be executed (step 022SHS54), and ends a series of processes. .. On the other hand, when the current jackpot is not the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS53: NO), that is, when the current jackpot is the 10R probability variation jackpot B or the 10R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the Chantime mode. The ending effect indicating the above is set to be executed (step 022SHS55), and a series of processes is completed. The bonus rush icon is not displayed in Chantime mode.

By the above-described processing, the bonus rush icon can be changed to a display mode (for example, red) indicating the completion of the jackpot during the ending period of the jackpot game. Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation big hit A, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even in the small hit RUSH mode. Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B or the normal jackpot, the bonus rush icon can be hidden in the Chantime mode.

(Example of transition of production mode and jackpot production screen)
Next, an example of the transition of the effect mode and the effect screen of the jackpot will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-6 to 12-8. FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen from the normal mode to the small hit RUSH mode. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen from the small hit RUSH mode to the Chantime mode. FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen when the small hit RUSH mode continues.

FIG. 12-6 (A) shows a variable display in the normal mode. Specifically, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the first small symbol 022SH101 are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays a variable display of decorative symbols based on a display result, a variation pattern, and a game state specified by an effect control command received from the main board 11. The result (fixed decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol, the presence / absence of execution of various effects such as reach effect and various advance notice effects, and the effect mode according to the game state, the mode and the execution start timing, etc. are determined. Based on the decision result, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. Further, in (A), the active display 022SH110 is displayed in the central region below the image display device 5. In (A), when the variable display period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 12-6 (B) shows a screen when the decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot A is derived and displayed in the normal mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the first small symbol 022SH101 are stopped and displayed with the definite symbol "7,7,7" which is a combination showing the 10R probability variation jackpot A. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 has read, for example, an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol 022SH100 (and the first small symbol 022SH101) from the effect control pattern, or , The final decorative symbol 022SH100, which is the display result of the decorative symbol 022SH100, is stopped and displayed in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol 022SH100 is to be stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 12-6 (C) shows a screen of the fanfare period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH105 showing a 10R probability variation jackpot A and a bonus rush icon 022SH120. The bonus rush icon 022SH120 is composed of three icon images 022SH120a to 120c indicating blanks. The three icon images 022SH120a to 120c indicate that there is a state in which the game value for three times is given, that is, the current jackpot, the small hit RUSH mode after the end of the current jackpot, and the next jackpot. In displaying the screen shown in (C), the effect control CPU 120 displays the jackpot notification image 022SH105 and the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in response to receiving, for example, a jackpot start designation command from the main board 11. Let me.

FIG. 12-6 (D) shows a screen during the fifth round game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 that notifies that it is the fifth round of the 10R probability variation jackpot A. Further, in (D), the total prize ball number display 022SH130 is displayed. The total number of prize balls display 022SH130 indicates the total number of prize balls in the consecutive chan including the small hit RUSH mode. The total prize ball number display 022SH 130 may display the fanfare period shown in FIG. 12-6 (C). Further, in (D), a notification image including the characters "right-handed" is displayed as a notification image corresponding to the right-handed notification in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5. In displaying the screen shown in (D), the effect control CPU 120 displays the round notification image 022SH106 in response to receiving, for example, a display command during opening of the large winning opening from the main board 11.

FIG. 12-6 (E) shows a screen of the ending period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 has a color on the small hit RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled, and the icon image 022SH120a (first from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120. The image with is displayed. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120a is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot has been completed. In displaying the screen shown in (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 and the icon image 022SH120a in response to, for example, receiving a big hit end designation command from the main board 11. Display a colored image.

As described above, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Further, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed in a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the jackpot game state.

FIG. 12-6 (F) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. The bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed over a plurality of gaming states, that is, a jackpot gaming state and a second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). Further, in (F), the hold display 022SH111 indicating the second hold storage is displayed in the right side region on the active display 022SH110 of the image display device 5.

FIG. 12-6 (G) shows a screen in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small hit game.

FIG. 12-6 (H) shows a screen during a small hit game in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small hit game state, when there is a prize in the special winning opening, the image display device 5 displays a winning effect image 022SH131 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls). In (H), for example, it is shown that two balls have been won in the special winning opening and two prize balls (a total of 20 balls have been paid out) have been paid out. Further, the total prize ball number display 022SH130 indicates the total number of the prize balls in the big hit and the prize balls in the small hit RUSH mode, and can be displayed over the big hit game state and the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state). Is. The total prize ball number display 022SH130 shows a number added by 20 balls as compared with (G) in FIG. 12-6. After that, the screen transitions to any of the screens shown in FIG. 12-7 (I) and FIG. 12-8 (I).

FIG. 12-7 (I) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode.

In FIG. 12-7 (J), in the small hit RUSH mode, the decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating either the probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B) or the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot) is derived and displayed. The screen when it is done is shown. Specifically, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are a combination of the definite symbols "2, 2, 2" indicating that there is a possibility of either a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. Is displayed as a stop. In (J), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (K).

FIG. 12-7 (K) shows a screen of the fanfare period of the big hit game controlled in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot, and an icon image 022SH120b of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (second from the bottom). ) Is displayed as a colored image. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled. Further, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is continuously displayed even after the transition from the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) to the big hit gaming state. Further, in the jackpot notification image 022SH115, a suggestion effect using a bow and arrow is performed, which suggests that the character has a bow and arrow and may be controlled to the small hit RUSH mode after the jackpot game in the jackpot game. Show that.

In this way, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed over a plurality of gaming states, that is, the previous jackpot gaming state, the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), and the current jackpot gaming state. In addition, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Further, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (icon image 022SH120b) is displayed in a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state) is controlled.

FIG. 12-7 (L) shows a screen during the fifth round game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a suggestion effect image 022SH116 suggesting that the small hit RUSH mode may be controlled after the current big hit. For example, the suggestion effect includes a success effect in which the displayed character hits the target with a bow and arrow, and a failure effect in which the displayed character cannot hit the target.

FIG. 12-7 (M) shows a screen showing a failure as an effect result in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a failure effect image 022SH117 in which the displayed character could not hit the target with a bow and arrow. By displaying the failure effect image 022SH117, it is suggested to the player that the small hit RUSH mode is not controlled after the big hit game this time.

In the fifth round, the failure effect image 022SH117 is displayed, and in the subsequent rounds and the ending period, an image showing success is displayed. The revival effect (controlled to the small hit RUSH mode after this big hit game). The effect of indicating) may be made feasible. In addition, as a suggestion effect, a blank icon image is prepared for an effect that is likely to be added or an effect that is unlikely to be added, and one of the effects selected by the judgment is executed. Moi.

FIG. 12-7 (N) shows a screen of the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 contains an image in which the Chantime mode transition notification image 022SH118 indicating that the control is controlled in the Chantime mode and a blank (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 are filled. It is displayed. A colored image is displayed on the icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot has been completed. As described above, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game.

In the feature unit 022SH, the jackpot that can be won in the small hit RUSH mode is a jackpot of 10 rounds having a common number of rounds. Therefore, the game value given to the player by the big hit game in the small hit RUSH mode is common. For this reason, in the feature unit 022SH, when the icon image of the bonus rush icon 022SH is set to the display mode indicating the completion of the big hit, the display mode is uniformly "red" regardless of the big hit type.

Of the icon images 022SH120a to 120c of the bonus rush icon 022SH120, the bottom icon image 022SH120a and the top icon image 022SH120c are colored red, and the middle icon image 022SH120b is colored yellow. It will be. Therefore, when displaying the icon images 022SH120a to 120c (for example, see (C) in FIG. 12-6), the bottom icon image 022SH120a, the top icon image 022SH120c, and the middle icon image 022SH120b May be displayed in a different display mode from the beginning (from the blank state). For example, the icon image 022SH120b in the middle may have a larger display area than the other icon images 022SH120a, 120c. As a result, even if each icon image 022SH120a to 120c is blank, the player is asked whether the icon image corresponds to the big hit or the icon image corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode depending on the display mode of the blank. Can be suggested.

FIG. 12-7 (O) shows a variable display in the Chantime mode. Specifically, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. The Chantime mode is controlled when it is in the first KT state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state). In Chantime mode, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 has been erased.

Next, FIG. 12-8 will be described. FIGS. 12-8 (I) to (L) are screens similar to the screens shown in FIGS. 12-7 (I) to (L). Therefore, the description of FIGS. 12-8 (I) to (L) will be omitted.

FIG. 12-8 (M) shows a screen showing success as an effect result in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a success effect image 022SH127 in which the displayed character was able to hit the target with a bow and arrow. Further, two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blanks are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120. These two icon images 022SH120d and 120e are given the game value for two times thereafter, the small hit RUSH mode after the end of the big hit (after the end of the second big hit) and the next big hit (the third big hit). Indicates that a new state to be obtained has been added. In this way, in the bonus rush icon 022SH120, there are icon images 022SH120a and 120b in display modes (red and yellow) corresponding to the completed game, and blanks corresponding to a plurality of states in which the game value can be given thereafter. The icon images 022SH120c to 120e of the display mode of the above can be displayed at the same time.

FIG. 12-8 (N) shows a screen of the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small hit RUSH continuous notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (third from the bottom). ) Is displayed as a colored image. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot has been completed.

FIG. 12-8 (O) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (P), every time the 10R probability variation big hit A is executed in the small hit RUSH mode, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 has two icons indicating blanks. Images 022SH120f, 120g are additionally displayed.

In the explanation of FIG. 12-8, it is not specified that it is the 10R probability variation jackpot A until the result of the suggestion effect is displayed, but when the variable display result is derived and displayed, it is the 10R probability variation jackpot A. You may specify that. That is, in the explanation of FIG. 12-8, in the variable display determined to be the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the combination "2,2" indicating that the decorative symbol 022SH100 may be either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot. 2 ”is stopped and displayed, and the success effect image 022SH127 is displayed by the suggestion effect during the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in the variable display determined to be the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the decorative symbol 022SH100 is displayed. The stop display may be performed with the combination "7,7,7" indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot A.

In this case, the timing for adding the two icon images 120d and 120e to the bonus rush icon 022SH 120 may be, for example, a fanfare period, a round game, or an ending period. Further, in this case, although the combination "7,7,7" of the decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot A is stopped and displayed, before adding the two icon images 120d and 120e to the bonus rush icon 022SH120, Suggestion effects may be performed. In this case, since it is clear that the effect indicating success is performed as the result effect in the suggestion effect, the player can play while watching the suggestion effect with peace of mind. On the other hand, since the combination "7,7,7" indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot A has already been stopped and displayed, two icon images 120d and 120e are added to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 without any suggestion effect. You may let me.

Further, when it is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot A, it is determined whether to perform an effect that clearly indicates that it is a 10R probability variation jackpot A or an effect that is not explicitly indicated, and one of the effects determined by the determination is performed. You may do it.

(Bonus rush icon control processing in variable display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-9, a process for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon in the variable display will be described. FIG. 12-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the bonus rush icon control process in the variable display. The bonus rush icon control process in the variable display is a process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-9, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit RUSH mode is in progress (step 022SHS71). When not in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes as it is. When in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination (step 022SHS72).

When there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit (step 022SHS72: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon is changed (step 022SHS73). In the determination of step 022SHS73, the bonus rush icon display change determination table shown in FIG. 12-10 (A) is used.

(About the bonus / rush icon display change determination table)
Here, the bonus rush icon display change determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-10. FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bonus rush icon display change determination table. FIG. 12-10 (A) is a table used for determining whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the hold storage is changed.

Specifically, FIG. 12-10 (A) is a table showing the execution rate of the bonus / rush icon display change for each jackpot type, which is used when the jackpot is determined by the look-ahead determination. .. More specifically, in the table of FIG. 12-10 (A), the "look-ahead determination result" indicates the jackpot type by the look-ahead determination. In addition, the "bonus / rush icon display change execution rate" indicates "yes" that changes the display and "none" that does not change the display.

For example, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the rate at which the display change of the bonus rush icon is performed is "25/100". Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, the ratio of the display change of the bonus rush icon is "10/100". Therefore, when the hold memory of the big hit is stored, the 10R probability variation big hit A, that is, the case where the small hit RUSH mode continues after the big hit game, the case where the small hit RUSH mode does not continue after the big hit game It is easier to change the display of the bonus rush icon.

Returning to FIG. 12-9, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon as a result of the determination in step 022SHS73 (step 022SHS74). When the display of the bonus rush icon is not changed (step 022SHS74: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.

When changing the display of the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS74: YES), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the display mode of the corresponding icon image is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (for example, yellow). The display change effect to be changed to is set to be executed (step 022SHS75), and a series of processes is completed.

In step 022SHS72, when there is no hold memory determined to be a jackpot in advance (step 022SHS72: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot display result is derived and displayed in the current variable display. (Step 022SHS76). When the jackpot display result is not derived and displayed in the variable display this time (step 022SHS76: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.

On the other hand, if the jackpot display result is derived and displayed in this variable display (step 022SHS76: YES), is the bonus rush icon displayed changed at the hold storage stage before the start of this variable display? It is determined whether or not (step 022SHS77). When the display of the bonus rush icon has been changed at the stage of hold storage (step 022SHS77: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. If the display of the bonus rush icon has not been changed at the stage of hold storage (step 022SHS77: NO), it is determined whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon has been changed (step 022SHS78), and the process proceeds to step 022SHS74. In the determination of step 022SHS78, the bonus rush icon display change determination table shown in FIG. 12-10 (B) is used.

Here, FIG. 12-10 (B) is a table used when determining whether or not there is a display change of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, FIG. 12-10 (B) shows the execution rate of the bonus / rush icon display change for each jackpot type, which is used when the jackpot determination corresponding to the variable display determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. The table shown. More specifically, in the table of FIG. 12-10 (B), the "big hit determination result" indicates the big hit type when the variable display this time is a big hit. In addition, the "bonus / rush icon display change execution rate" indicates "yes" that changes the display and "none" that does not change the display.

For example, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the rate at which the display change of the bonus rush icon is performed is "10/100". Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, the ratio of the display change of the bonus rush icon is "25/100". Therefore, during the variable display from which the display result of the jackpot is derived, the 10R probability variation jackpot B or the 10R normal jackpot (when the small hit RUSH mode ends after the jackpot game) is better than the 10R probability variation jackpot A. However (compared to the case where the small hit RUSH mode continues after the big hit game), the display change of the bonus rush icon is more likely to occur.

By using the tables shown in FIGS. 12-10 (A) and 12-10, it is possible to suggest the continuation or termination of the small hit RUSH mode depending on the timing at which the bonus rush icon is displayed. Specifically, if the display mode of the bonus rush icon changes during the hold storage, there is a high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will continue, and the display mode of the bonus rush icon will change during the variable display. If it changes, it can be suggested that the small hit RUSH mode is likely to end.

In the above description, it is suggested that the small hit RUSH mode may continue depending on whether the information regarding the variable display of the target is in the hold storage or the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regarding the information related to the variable display of the target, the small hit RUSH mode continues depending on whether the variable display result (big hit symbol) is before the derivation display (during hold storage or variable display) or after the derivation display (during the big hit game). You may suggest the possibility. Specifically, there is a high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will continue before the derivation display of the variable display result (big hit symbol), while the small hit RUSH mode is after the derivation display of the variable display result. May suggest that is likely to end.

(Screen transition when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12-11, the transition of the effect screen when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed during the variable display will be described. FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed during the variable display.

FIG. 12-11 (A) shows a screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 is started in the small hit RUSH mode. Further, in (A), a hold display 022SH111 indicating the second hold storage is displayed. The hold display 022SH111 shown in (A) is a display mode different from the normal display mode, and specifically, is a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. The hold storage corresponding to the hold display 022SH111 is, for example, the hold memory determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination.

FIG. 12-11 (B) shows a screen during variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 similar to (A). In (B), an image in which yellow is added to the icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that the big hit game is performed (the small hit RUSH mode is terminated or interrupted). The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is, for example, a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode has been controlled.

FIG. 12-11 (C) shows a screen in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small hit game. After (C), it is controlled to the small hit game state, and when the small hit game is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (D).

FIG. 12-11 (D) shows a screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113 is started in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, (D) shows a screen when the high-expectation hold display 022SH111 moves to the active display 022SH113 and the variable display is started.

In FIG. 12-11 (E), in the small hit RUSH mode, the decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating either the probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B) or the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot) is derived and displayed. The screen when it is done is shown. In (E), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F).

FIG. 12-11 (F) shows a screen of the fanfare period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot.

FIG. 12-11 (G) shows a screen showing success as an effect result in the suggestion effect performed in the fifth round. Specifically, when the type of jackpot being executed is 10R probability variation jackpot A, the success effect image 127 is displayed as shown in (G). When the type of jackpot being executed is 10R probability variation jackpot B or 10R normal jackpot, the failure effect image 022SH117 is displayed in (G) as shown in FIG. 12-7 (M). Further, in (G), two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blanks are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120.

FIG. 12-11 (H) shows a screen of the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small hit RUSH continuous notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (third from the bottom). ) Is displayed as a colored image. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot (second jackpot) has been completed.

The symbol variation time in the variation display of FIGS. 12-11 (A) to (C) is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. Therefore, the timing for coloring the icon image 022SH120b shown in (B) may be substantially the same as the start of the variable display, that is, the timing at which the screen shown in (A) is displayed.

Further, the timing of performing the effect of adding a color (yellow) to the icon image 022SH120b may be, for example, the timing of storing the hold storage corresponding to the hold display 022SH111, or the hold display 022SH111 shifts to the active display 022SH113. Active display 022SH113 This may be the timing after the corresponding variable display is started.

Further, the fanning effect may be performed before the effect of coloring the icon image 022SH120b. For example, the fanning effect includes an action effect acting on the icon image 022SH120b. After this action effect, an effect of coloring the icon image 022SH120b may be performed. It should be noted that the icon image 022SH120b may be uncolored, that is, a so-called ghost effect may be performed after the fanning effect.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, there are a plurality of states (second KT state and the next big hit game) in which the game value can be given as the state after the big hit game in the big hit game by the bonus rush icon 022SH120. It can be suggested that it exists. For example, in the current jackpot game, after the current jackpot game, there are at least two or more states advantageous to the player, including the second KT state and the next jackpot game (in the present embodiment, the current jackpot). It can be suggested that there are three states: the game, the second KT state, and the next big hit game). Therefore, in the current jackpot game, it is possible to clarify that a state advantageous to the player can occur thereafter, so that the player can be further uplifted during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 022SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 022SH, the timing of adding the icon images 022SH120d and 120e showing two blanks to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is set to the round game in the 10R probability variation jackpot A. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 1, the timing of adding the icon images 022SH120d, 120e indicating two blanks to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed in a variable display. The case where the result (big hit symbol) is before being derived and displayed will be described.

Specifically, when the effect executing means related to the feature unit 022SH is determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination, and this hold memory is determined to be a big hit to shift to the second KT state after the big hit, Before the variable display of this hold memory is started, a blank icon image is added to the bonus rush icon. If the variable display this time is a big hit and the big hit shifts to the second KT state after the big hit, the effect execution means may add a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon during the variable display. ..

Next, the transition of the effect screen according to the first modification will be described. FIG. 12-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen according to the first modification when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed. FIG. 12-12 (A) shows a screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 is started in the small hit RUSH mode. Further, in (A), a hold display 022SH111 indicating the second hold storage is displayed. The hold display 022SH111 shown in (A) is a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. The hold storage corresponding to the hold display 022SH111 is a hold memory determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot A by the look-ahead determination.

FIG. 12-12 (B) shows a screen during variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 similar to (A). In (B), two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blanks are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is controlled by the big hit game of the 10R probability variation big hit A and that the small hit RUSH mode is continued.

FIG. 12-12 (C) shows a screen in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed during the small hit RUSH mode.

FIG. 12-12 (D) shows a screen when the high expectation hold display 022SH111 moves to the active display 022SH113 and the variable display is started. In (D), when the variable display period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

FIG. 12-12 (E) shows a screen when the decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating the 10R probability variation big hit A is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH mode. In (E), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F).

FIG. 12-12 (F) shows a screen of the fanfare period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a colored image on the jackpot notification image 022SH105 showing the 10R probability variation jackpot A and the icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120. ing. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled.

FIG. 12-12 (G) shows a screen during the fifth round game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 that notifies that it is the fifth round of the 10R probability variation jackpot A.

FIG. 12-12 (H) shows a screen of the ending period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small hit RUSH continuous notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (third from the bottom). ) Is displayed as a colored image. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot has been completed.

The symbol variation time in the variation display of FIGS. 12-12 (A) to (C) is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. Therefore, the timing of adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e shown in (B) may be substantially the same as the start of the variable display, that is, the timing at which the screen shown in (A) is displayed. May be good.

Further, the timing of adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e may be, for example, the timing of storing the hold storage corresponding to the hold display 022SH111, or the hold display 022SH111 shifts to the active display 022SH113. Active display 022SH113 This may be the timing after the corresponding variable display is started.

Further, the fanning effect may be performed before the effect of adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e. For example, the fanning effect includes an action effect acting on the bonus rush icon 022SH120. After this action effect, an effect of adding two icon images 022SH120d and 120e may be performed. In addition, after the fanning effect, a so-called ghost effect may be performed in which the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e are not added.

(Modification example 2 of the feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 022SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 022 is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 022SH to a so-called one-kind-two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine. Since the pachinko gaming machine of the one-kind and two-kind mixed type is shown in the above-mentioned modification 1 of the feature portion 020SH, detailed description thereof will be omitted and only necessary points will be described.

In the one-kind-two-kind mixed type gaming machine, the small hit probability is, for example, about 1/100 in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening. Further, even if the small hit game is executed based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the game ball rarely wins in the special variable winning ball device 17, and even if it wins, it is specified. It rarely passes through the region (V region). That is, it can hardly be expected that the game value will be given by the small hit game based on the winning of the first starting winning opening.

On the other hand, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit probability is, for example, about 1/7 (≈14 / 100). Further, when the small hit game is executed based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 and almost passes through the specific region (V region). .. Therefore, the small hit game based on the winning of the second start winning opening is performed, so that the game is controlled to be substantially in the big hit game state.

In addition, in a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko game machine, depending on the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability), a special state (for example, a time saving state: main) is performed after the jackpot game until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed. It is controlled to the state in which the variable display of the second special figure game is performed). In the second modification, for example, the time is controlled to be shortened until the variable display is executed seven times in the jackpot game. Then, in the second special figure game in the special state, the small hit game is performed, so that the big hit game state is controlled again. In the big hit game state, when the second reserved memory determined to be a small hit is stored, a number of big hit games corresponding to the number of the second reserved storage determined to be a small hit is subsequently performed. It will be.

Here, even in the one-type and two-type mixed type game, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value (first starting port: about 1/100, second starting port: about 1/7). On the other hand, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is about 1/100.
When the set value is "2", it is about 1/95.
When the set value is "3", it is about 1/90.
When the set value is "4", it is about 1/85.
When the set value is "5", it is about 1/80.
When the set value is "6", it is about 1/75.

Therefore, for the so-called first hit (big hit in the normal game state: big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol), the difference according to the set value can be increased. On the other hand, for the big hit of the consecutive villa (big hit during the time saving game: big hit via the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol), the difference according to the set value can be reduced. That is, during the time-saving game, the difference in the continuation rate depending on the set value can be reduced.

In the second modification, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the existence of a plurality of jackpot gaming states as a state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the jackpot gaming state. The specific display referred to here is a specific display (referred to as a "bonus icon") indicating that a big hit game will be performed thereafter. For example, if the second reserved memory number determined to be a small hit and pre-reading is "2" at the start of the big hit game, it corresponds to the current big hit and the second reserved storage number "2" determined to be a small hit and pre-reading. Three big hits will be made by adding the two big hits. Therefore, a bonus icon consisting of three icon images indicating that three big hits are performed is displayed. The timing for displaying the bonus icon may be, for example, the fanfare period of the jackpot game.

When the first jackpot game is completed, the icon image indicating the first blank of the bonus icons may be colored (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot has been completed. Further, when the second jackpot game is completed, the icon image indicating the second blank of the bonus icons may be colored (for example, red) indicating that the second jackpot has been completed. At the start of the second big hit game, if the second reserved memory number determined to be a small hit and pre-read is newly stored, a bonus icon indicating a blank for that amount may be added.

As described above, even in the one-type and two-type mixed type gaming machine, it is possible to display a bonus icon (specific display) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of jackpots thereafter in the jackpot gaming state.

In the second modification, the case where the blank of the bonus icon is displayed according to the second reserved storage number determined to be a small hit and the look-ahead is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of big hits can be expected based on the variable display number controlled in the special state (time saving state), the blanks of the number of bonus icons corresponding to the number of big hits are displayed. May be good. For example, when the small hit probability based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set to a probability close to 100%, the variable display number controlled in the special state (time saving state) and the number of large hits that can be expected to occur are almost the same. Since they are equal, the blanks of the bonus icon for the variable display number of times controlled in the special state (the number of times the jackpot occurs) may be displayed. Specifically, assuming that only 3 fluctuations are controlled to the special state after the big hit game, at the start of the big hit game, the current big hit and the 3 big hits corresponding to the 3 variable displays in the special state are set. It suffices to display the bonus icons indicating four blanks indicating that the added four jackpots will be performed. Then, during the ending period of this big hit, the blank corresponding to this big hit may be colored to indicate that this big hit has been completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the feature unit 022SH can be expressed as follows. It is a gaming machine capable of performing a game (a pachinko gaming machine of a kind and two kinds mixed type), and includes a gaming state controlling means for controlling the gaming state and an effect executing means, and the gaming state controlling means is provided. An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), and a special state in which the game value is likely to be given by the special state (for example, a time saving). State), and after being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to the special state, and after being controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the advantageous state. When controlled to the advantageous state, a specific display (for example, a bonus icon) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states (for example, a jackpot gaming state) in which a game value can be given as a state after being controlled to the advantageous state. ) Can be displayed.

According to the second modification, it is decided to display the bonus icon corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which the game value can be given as the state after the big hit game during the big hit game. Thereby, for example, in the first jackpot game, it can be suggested that after the jackpot game, there are at least two or more states advantageous to the player, including the current jackpot and the next jackpot game. Therefore, in the first big hit game, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that a big hit can occur thereafter, so that the player can be further uplifted during the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit in the one-type and two-type mixed type game machine.

(Modification example 3 of feature unit 022SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 022SH, a configuration for displaying a specific display (bonus rush icon) on the image display device 5 has been described. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 3, a configuration in which the specific display is displayed in an area other than the image display device 5 will be described.

For example, it is possible to display the specific display on a decorative LED, another display device (sub liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5, and the like. First, a case where a specific display is represented by a decorative LED will be described.

When the specific display is represented by the decorative LEDs, for example, a predetermined number of decorative LEDs are arranged on the game board 2. Specifically, for example, 10 LEDs are arranged vertically side by side on the game board 2. Then, when controlled by the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, in the jackpot game, the three decorative LEDs from the bottom are turned on in white. The white lighting of the three decorative LEDs indicates that there is a state in which the game value for three times is given, that is, this big hit, the small hit RUSH mode after the end of this big hit, and the next big hit. Shown.

Then, during the ending period of the first jackpot, the bottom LED of the three LEDs lit in white is lit in red. As a result, it is possible to notify that the first big hit has been completed. Further, when the small hit RUSH mode is controlled to the big hit gaming state (second big hit), the second LED from the bottom is turned on in yellow during the big hit fanfare period. As a result, it is possible to notify that the small hit RUSH mode has been controlled.

Furthermore, during the ending period of the second big hit, the third LED from the bottom is turned on in red. As a result, it is possible to notify that the second big hit has been completed. If the second jackpot is a 10R probability variation jackpot A, in the jackpot gaming state (for example, the fifth round), the fourth and fifth LEDs from the bottom can be turned on in white. Good. By lighting the two LEDs in white, a new state is added in which the small hit RUSH mode after the end of the second big hit and the third big hit are given the game value for two times thereafter. Can be done.

If the consecutive villas continue, all 10 decorative LEDs may light up. In this case, it is assumed that the lighting of the first round has been completed, and the lighting of the second round is started. Specifically, the display mode of the bottom LED may be changed and turned on. For example, the bottom LED may be lit in a color (for example, purple) indicating the second round of lighting. Further, even when the big hit or small hit RUSH mode is completed after the second round of lighting is performed, the corresponding LEDs may be turned on in a display mode different from that of the first round.

In this way, by representing the specific display by the decorative LED, the decorative LED can be focused on, and the display area of the image display device 5 can be effectively utilized.

Next, a configuration that enables the bonus rush icon to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal will be described. All the bonus rush icons related to the feature unit 022SH described above may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. Further, the bonus rush icon may be displayed in a different display area depending on the game state. For example, the bonus rush icon may be displayed on the image display device 5 in the big hit game state, and may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal in the small hit RUSH mode. As a result, in the small hit RUSH mode, the image display device 5 can pay attention to the prize balls in the small hit game and the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive chan, and in the big hit game state, the bonus rush icon. Can be noticed. As a result, the image display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal can be effectively used.

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 022SH, the display mode of the bonus rush icon indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled is set to one display mode (for example, yellow). In the fourth modification, a case where a plurality of display modes can be taken as the display mode of the bonus rush icon indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled will be described.

Specifically, the effect executing means according to the feature unit 022SH may display the display mode of the bonus rush icon in a display mode according to the number of continuations of the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). For example, the effect executing means is a bonus when the variable display of 50 fluctuations or more is executed in the small hit RUSH mode and controlled to the big hit gaming state (when the profit degree in the small hit RUSH mode is high). -The display mode of the rush icon is set to the yellow display mode.

Further, the effect executing means is a bonus when the variable display of less than 50 fluctuations is executed in the small hit RUSH mode and controlled to the big hit gaming state (when the profit degree in the small hit RUSH mode is low). -The display mode of the rush icon is set to the blue display mode. Thereby, the number of continuations for each small hit RUSH mode can be suggested to the player by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when more yellow display modes are displayed on the bonus rush icon than blue, the player can obtain a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 022SH, the display mode of the bonus rush icon when the jackpot game is completed is one display mode (for example, red). In the fifth modification, a case where a plurality of display modes can be taken as the display mode of the bonus rush icon when the big hit game is completed will be described.

Specifically, the effect executing means according to the feature unit 022SH may display the display mode of the icon image of the bonus rush icon in a display mode according to the type of jackpot. For example, when the big hit game of the 10R probability variation big hit A is performed, the effect executing means sets the display mode of the bonus rush icon to the red display mode. As a result, the bonus rush icon is displayed in a red display mode, which suggests the continuation of the small hit RUSH mode (continuation of the consecutive villas). Further, when the 10R probability variation big hit B big hit game or the 10R normal big hit big hit game is performed, the bonus rush icon is displayed in green. As a result, the bonus rush icon is displayed in a green display mode, which indicates the end of the small hit RUSH mode (end of the consecutive villa).

Further, in the embodiment according to the feature unit 022SH, the jackpot type that can continue the small hit RUSH mode is one type of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, but may be a plurality of types. For example, the jackpot type that can continue the small hit RUSH mode may be a 5R probability variable jackpot in addition to the 10R probability variable jackpot A. In this case, the effect executing means sets the display mode of the bonus rush icon to the red display mode when the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A is performed. In addition, the effect executing means sets the bonus rush icon in an orange display mode when a jackpot game of 5R probability variation jackpot is performed. Thereby, the given game value can be suggested by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when the bonus rush icon displays more red display modes than orange, the player can obtain a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and thus can improve the interest of the game.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 022SH, as shown in FIGS. 12-11, the display mode is changed before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed). The icon image was designated as the second icon image 022SH120b from the bottom. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 6, the icon of the target whose display mode is changed before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed). The image may be the third icon image 022SH120c from the bottom (see FIG. 12-11).

Specifically, in the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 022SH, the second icon image 022SH120b from the bottom of the bonus rush icon is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode before the start of the big hit game. The case where the display mode is provided with the indicated color (yellow) has been described. In the modified example 6, before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed), the jackpot hits the third icon image 022SH120c (see FIG. 12-11) in the bonus rush icon from the bottom. It may be a colored display mode indicating that it is executed.

Specifically, when there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination, an effect of adding red to the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom may be performed. Even with such a configuration, it can be suggested that the next big hit will be executed before the big hit is started.

Further, the display mode after the change of the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom is not limited to the display mode with red color, and may be a display mode according to the jackpot type. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot type obtained by the look-ahead determination for the hold memory corresponding to the hold display 022SH111 is the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom is displayed in red. Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B or the normal jackpot, the display mode may be pink. Thereby, the jackpot type to be executed can be suggested by the display mode (color) of the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom.

In addition to this, for example, when the jackpot type obtained by the look-ahead determination for the hold memory corresponding to the hold display 022SH111 is the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the third icon image from the bottom, the icon image 022SH120c, has a blinking speed. It may be easy to become a fast blinking mode. Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B or the normal jackpot, the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom may be likely to be in a lighting mode with a slow blinking speed. Thereby, the display mode (blinking mode) of the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom can suggest the jackpot type that is likely to be executed.

(Modification example 7 of feature unit 022SH)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 022SH, the bonus rush icon can be displayed from the start of the big hit that triggers the start of the small hit RUSH mode to the end of the big hit that ends the small hit RUSH mode. And said. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 7, even if the small hit RUSH mode ends and the mode shifts to the Chantime mode (first KT state) (falls), a bonus is provided. A case where the rush icon can be continuously displayed will be described.

In the small hit RUSH mode, when the big hit game of 10R probability variation big hit B or 10R normal big hit is executed, it is controlled to the chance time mode (first KT state: high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state). Here, even in the chance time mode, it is quite possible that a big hit will occur. Therefore, in the modification 7, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even in the chance time mode.

For example, in the Chantime mode, all the icon images of the bonus rush icon are displayed in a colored state. In addition, the timing for erasing the bonus rush icon may be when the mode shifts from the Chantime mode to the normal mode. In addition, when the big hit game of 10R probability variation big hit A is performed in the Chantime mode, that is, when the big hit game to shift to the small hit RUSH mode is performed, the bonus rush icon displayed is blank. You can add and display the icon image of.

In addition, the bonus rush icon may be continuously displayed only in the Chantime mode in the high probability / high base state. When controlled to a high probability / high base state, it is confirmed that at least one big hit will be made. For this reason, during the execution of the jackpot game (10R probability variation jackpot B) that shifts (falls) from the small hit RUSH mode to the Chantime mode, one blank icon image is added to the bonus rush icon. May be good. As a result, even if the player falls into the Chantime mode, the player hopes that at least the jackpot that has been confirmed to occur once more will be the 10R probability variation jackpot A (transition to the small hit RUSH mode). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the Chantime mode.

The Chantime mode is an effect mode in which the player is not allowed to determine whether the control is performed in the high probability / high base state or in the low probability / high base state. Here, if a bonus rush icon with one blank icon image added is displayed in the Chantime mode, it is possible for the player to determine that the control is performed in a high probability / high base state. Become. Therefore, when displaying the bonus rush icon when it is controlled in the high probability / high base state, another notification that it is in the high probability / high base state is performed without controlling to the Chantime mode. It may be controlled to the production mode.

In addition, when controlled to a high probability / high base state, an effect determination is made as to whether or not to continuously display the bonus rush icon, and the bonus rush icon is continued according to the result of the effect determination. May be displayed. Specifically, when a positive determination result is obtained by the effect determination, a bonus rush icon to which one blank icon image is added may be displayed in a high probability / high base state. As a result, even if the bonus rush icon is not displayed, there is a possibility that the player is controlled in the high probability / high base state, so the player hopes that the game is controlled in the high probability / high base state. can do.

In the modified example 7, when adding a blank icon image, a suggestion effect (see, for example, FIGS. 12-8 (L) and (M)) may be performed. In addition, as a suggestion effect, an effect with a high possibility of adding two blank icon images, an effect with a high possibility of adding one, and an effect with a high possibility of not being added are prepared and judged. You may choose to perform any of the effects selected by. This makes it possible to improve the interest of suggestive production.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 022SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature unit 022SH, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that controls a special state in which the small hit gaming state is more frequently controlled than in the normal state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952). .. Further, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that displays a preview image corresponding to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit during a round game in the big hit game state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016). -135166 (Ab.). However, simply notifying the player of the game state after the end of the big hit does not allow the player to clearly grasp the state in which the game value can be given thereafter, and the interest is insufficient.

(Means E1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means E1 according to the feature unit 022SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and a gaming state control for controlling the gaming state. Means (for example, a portion for executing steps S120 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6) and effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) are provided. , The game state control means grants a game value by an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), and the special state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) that is likely to occur, and after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: 10R probability variation jackpot A), it is possible to control to the special state. After being controlled to the special state, the advantageous state (for example, the next big hit game state using the big hit type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 12-2: 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B and 10R normal It is possible to control to any one of the jackpots), and when the effect executing means is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: 10R probability variation jackpot A), after being controlled to the advantageous state. A specific display (bonus rush icon 022SH120 in FIG. 12-6 (C)) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states (for example, the second KT state and the next big hit game state) in which the game value can be given as the state of It can be displayed (for example, the process performed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in step 022SHS15 of FIG. 12-3).

According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that there are a plurality of states in which the game value can be given as the state after the advantageous state in the advantageous state by the specific display. Thereby, it is possible to clarify the state in which the game value can be subsequently given depending on the advantageous state. Therefore, for example, the satisfaction of the player in the advantageous state can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(Means E2)
Further, as the game machine of the means E2 according to the feature unit 022SH, in the game machine described in the means E1, the effect executing means has the advantageous state (for example, the current big hit game state: 10R probability variation big hit A) and the game. Corresponds to a controlled state (for example, this big hit game state: 10R probability variation big hit A) among a plurality of states (for example, a second KT state and the next big hit game state) that can be given value. Then, the display mode of the specific display can be changed (the red display mode indicating that the jackpot has been completed, as shown in step 022SHS52 in FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 (E)), and the bonus rush icon 022SH120. The display mode of is changeable).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the specific display can be changed according to the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to clarify the state in which the game value has already been given. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game in the state where the game value is given by the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can obtain a feeling of satisfaction due to the fact that the game value has already been given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(Means E3)
Further, as the game machine of the means E3 according to the feature unit 022SH, in the game machine described in the means E1 or the means E2, the specific display has a plurality of different display modes (for example, a red display mode and a yellow display mode). ), And the effect executing means includes the advantageous state (for example, the current big hit game state: 10R probability variation big hit A) and a plurality of states (for example, the second KT state and the next big hit) to which the game value can be given. Of the states including (game state), the display mode corresponding to the controlled state (for example, the red color corresponding to the completion of the jackpot game shown in step 022SHS52 in FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 (E)). It is possible to display a specific display of the display mode and the specific display of step 022SHS16 in FIG. 12-3 and the yellow display mode indicating that the second KT state is controlled as shown in FIG. 12-6 (E).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the type of the state in which the game value has already been given, depending on the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can easily grasp the type of the state in which the game value is given. Therefore, the player can obtain a feeling of satisfaction according to the type of the state in which the game value has already been given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means E4)
Further, as the game machine of the means E4 according to the feature unit 022SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means E1 to the means E3, the effect executing means corresponds to the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIG. The specific display of the red display mode corresponding to the completion of the big hit game shown in 12-6 (E) and the specific display of the predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states to which the game value can be given (for example, The blank icon image 022SH120d, 120e) shown in the bonus rush icon 022SH120 of FIG. 12-8 (M) can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the state in which the game value has already been given and the state in which the game value can be given thereafter, depending on the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can easily grasp the state in which the game value is given and the state in which the game value can be given thereafter. Therefore, the player can obtain a feeling of satisfaction due to the fact that the game value has already been given, and a feeling of expectation that there is a state in which the game value can be given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means E5)
Further, as the game machine of the means E5 according to the feature unit 022SH, in the game machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E4, the effect executing means has the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state) and the above. The specific display can be displayed over a plurality of states including a plurality of states (for example, a second KT state and a next big hit game state) to which a game value can be given (for example, FIG. 12-). As shown in 6 (E) and (F), the bonus rush icon 022SH120 can be displayed from the jackpot game state to the second KT state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously show the player a state in which the game value can be given even if the state changes from an advantageous state to a state in which the game value can be given. As a result, even if the state changes, the player can continue to obtain the satisfaction that the game value has already been given and the expectation that there is a state in which the game value can be given thereafter. Can be done. Therefore, the interest of the game can be maintained.

(Means E6)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E5 as the gaming machine of the means E6 according to the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means is in the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: 10R). The game value given in the probability variation big hit A (for example, the total prize ball number display 022SH130 in FIG. 12-6 (E)) and the game value given in the special state (for example, the second KT state) (for example). , The total prize ball number display 022SH130 in FIG. 12-6 (H) can be displayed over the advantageous state (for example, the first big hit game state) and the special state.

According to such a configuration, even if the state changes, the game value given in the advantageous state and the special state can be clearly shown. As a result, the player can continuously grasp the given game value even if the state changes. Therefore, for example, when the given game value is large, the player can obtain a feeling of satisfaction, and when the given game value is small contrary to the player's expectation, the player's willingness to play. Can stir up. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means E7)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E6 as the gaming machine of means E7 according to the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means is in an advantageous state (for example, after being controlled to the special state). , Next big hit game state), suggestive effect suggesting that the state is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the suggestive effect image of FIG. 12-8 (L)). 022SH116) is executed, and the game value is given as a state after being controlled to the advantageous state after the above, corresponding to the effect result of the suggestion effect (for example, the success effect image 022SH127 in FIG. 12-8 (M)). Display a specific display of a predetermined mode (for example, a blank display mode shown in step 022SHS36 in FIG. 12-4 and a bonus rush icon 022SH120 in FIG. 12-8 (M)) corresponding to a plurality of possible states. It is possible.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to incite whether or not there are a plurality of states (specifically, whether or not the consecutive villas will continue) in which the game value can be given thereafter in the later advantageous state. .. Therefore, even in the later advantageous state, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved as in the case of the earlier advantageous state.

(Means E8)
Further, as the game machine of the means E8 according to the feature unit 022SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means E1 to the means E7, an advantageous state before being controlled to the special state (for example, the current jackpot game state). : In the 10R probability variation jackpot A) and the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (for example, the next jackpot game state), a common number of round games (for example, 10 rounds) is executed, and the effect The executing means has a common display mode (for example, the bottom icon shown in FIG. 12-6 (E)) when it is controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state and when it is controlled to the later advantageous state. It is possible to display a specific display of the display mode of the image 022SH120a and the display mode of the top icon image 022SH120c shown in FIG. 12-7 (N), which is a common display mode).

According to such a configuration, the game value given in each advantageous state can be made equal, so that the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be a common display mode. Specifically, the display mode (for example, blank) of the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state that can be given is a common display mode (for example, a blank of the same shape) between the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. Can be. Further, the display mode (for example, red) of the specific display corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can also be a common display mode between the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. Therefore, for example, the player can easily grasp the estimation of the game value that can be given and the estimation of the game value that has been given by the number of specific displays. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific display.

(Means E9)
Further, as the game machine of the means E9 related to the feature unit 022SH, in the game machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E8, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second The variable display executing means (for example, the process executed by the CPU 103 shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-21) that can execute the variable display of the identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel is further provided. The game state control means can control the advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and the variable display of the second identification information is the second. 1 The advantage for the player is higher than the variable display of the identification information (for example, as shown in the jackpot type determination table of FIGS. 12-2 (A) and 12-2 (B), the jackpot type determination for the second special symbol). The table is more likely to be determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot A, and a jackpot with a large number of rounds is selected), and the effect executing means is used as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information. When the specific display result is controlled to the advantageous state based on the derivation display, the specific display is deleted (for example, in step 022SHS13: YES → step 022SHS17: YES → step 022SHS18 in FIG. 12-3). The process performed by the effect control CPU 120).

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 022SH can simultaneously execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, and the variable display of the second identification information. When the advantageous state is controlled based on the above, a specific display can be displayed. Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 022SH has a lower advantage for the player in the variable display of the first identification information than in the variable display of the second identification information, the specific display is specified in the variable display of the first identification information. By deriving and displaying the result, the state in which the game value can be given may disappear. Here, even though the state in which the game value can be given has disappeared, if the specific display is displayed, the interest of the game is lowered. Therefore, when the gaming machine of the means E9 is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information, the specific display is deleted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by being controlled in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information.

(Means E10)
Further, in the game machine described in any one of means E1 to E9 as the game machine of means E10 according to the feature unit 022SH, the game state control means has a specific display result (for example, a specific display result (for example,) as a display result of variable display. When the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state can be controlled, and the effect executing means is performing the variable display before the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, during execution of the variable display). ), The specific display can be displayed (for example, blank icon images 022SH120d, 120e in FIG. 12-12 (B) can be added).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the variable display.

(Means E11)
Further, as the game machine of the means E11 according to the feature unit 022SH, the display result indicating that the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state for the variable display which has not been started yet in the game machine according to the means E10. The pre-start determination means for determining (for example, pre-reading determination) is provided, and the effect executing means can display the specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means (for example, FIG. 12). As shown in -11 (B), the display mode of the icon image 022SH120b can be changed to a yellow display mode indicating that the icon image is controlled to the second KT state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the hold storage before the variable display.

(Explanation of feature section 026SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 026SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH includes a gaming state control means (state control means) and an effect executing means. The game state control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect executing means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. In addition to the above, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH includes, for example, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, a hold storage means, and a setting means. The variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the hold storage means, and the setting means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can be controlled into an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small hit gaming state.

The special state is a state in which the game value is easily given by the special state, for example, the second KT state (high probability / low base state). The second KT state is a game state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a game state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. The first KT state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state) is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, but it is also difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening. .. That is, the first KT state is a state in which the game value is hardly given by the special state.

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, it is possible to control the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and it is possible to control the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. The advantageous game referred to here is a big hit that shifts to the second KT state after the end of the big hit game state. The game state control means can be controlled to the second KT state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state again after being controlled to the second KT state.

The effect executing means executes various effects depending on the situation. For example, a meter effect or a character effect is executed. Details will be described later.

(About the movable body of the game machine related to the feature part 026SH)
FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of a part (near the image display device 5) of the game board 2 of the game machine according to the feature unit 026SH. As shown in FIG. 13-1 (A), for example, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH includes a movable body 026SH 32 which is an accessory in the vicinity of the image display device 5. The movable body 026SH 32 operates between the first state (initial state) and the second state (tilted state) as shown in FIGS. 13-1 (B) and 13-1 (C) under the control of the effect control board 12. For example, the movable body 026SH32 operates in the order of the first state → the second state → the first state, or operates in the order of the first state → the second state → the first state → the second state → the first state, or the first state. → State between 1st state and 2nd state (temporarily stopped) → 2nd state → 1st state and operation, 1st state → State between 1st state and 2nd state (temporarily stopped) → It may operate with the first state.

(About the meter production of the game machine related to the feature part 026SH)
FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a meter effect executed in the game machine according to the feature unit 026SH. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH executes a meter effect as shown in FIG. 13-2 during the variable display. 13-2 (A) to 13-2 (D) show each scene in which the meter effect is executed according to the control of the effect control board 12.

In FIG. 13-2 (A), the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG on the left side notifies which of the four stages (“1” to “4”) the meter value is. In FIG. 13-2 (A), the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG notifies that the meter value is “1”, which is the first stage (initial stage). In FIG. 13-2 (A), the level display 026SHLV on the upper part of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG notifies the level corresponding to the meter value notified by the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG. In FIG. 13-2 (A), the level display 026SHLV notifies that the level is "LEVEL 1" which is the first stage (initial stage). That is, in FIG. 13-2 (A), the meter value is "1", which is the first stage (initial stage), and the level is the first stage (initial stage) by the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV. It is a scene where it is notified that it is "LEVEL 1" which is a stage). In the lower left, the first small symbol 026SH101 corresponding to the decorative symbol is displayed. In the following description, the meter value may be referred to as the number of meters.

FIG. 13-2 (B) shows that the meter value is “2” in the second stage and the level is “LEVEL2” in the second stage by the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV. Is the scene where is being notified. FIG. 13-2 (C) shows that the meter value is "3", which is the third stage, and the level is "LEVEL3", which is the third stage, by the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV. Is the scene where is being notified. FIG. 13-2 (D) shows "4" in which the meter value is the fourth stage (final stage) and the level is the fourth stage (final stage) by the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV. It is a scene where it is notified that it is "LEVEL 4".

In the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, when the meter value reaches "4", which is the final stage in the meter effect, the movable body 026SH32 may operate (the character effect is executed) (FIG. 13-6). (D)). Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, when the meter value reaches "4", which is the final stage in the meter production, the super reach (SP) is set (see FIG. 13-5 (A), etc.). ..

FIG. 13-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 13-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the meter effect and the accessory effect (the effect of operating the movable body 026SH32) in the non-KT state (normal state). FIG. 13-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the accessory effect in the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH). Note that FIG. 13-3 (B) will be described later.

Specifically, FIG. 13-3 (A) shows the execution timing of the meter effect, the character effect, and the like when the meter effect and the character effect are executed in the variable display that becomes the super reach. An example is shown. In FIG. 13-3 (A), Ta0 to Ta10 are periods during variable display. Ta10 to Ta11 are periods during the stop display. Ta0 to Ta1 are pre-reach periods. Ta1 to Ta9 are periods of normal reach. Ta9 to Ta10 are periods of super reach.

In FIG. 13-3 (A), Ta2 to Ta8 are execution periods of the meter effect. Of Ta2 to Ta8, Ta2 to Ta3 are scenes in which the meter value is "1" as shown in FIG. 13-2 (A). Ta3 to Ta4 are scenes for notifying that the meter value is "2" as shown in FIG. 13-2 (B). Ta4 to Ta7 are scenes for notifying that the meter value is "3" as shown in FIG. 13-2 (C). Ta7 to Ta8 are scenes for notifying that the meter value is "4" as shown in FIGS. 13-D (C). In other words, Ta3 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "1" to "2" in the meter production. Ta4 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "2" to "3" in the meter production. Ta7 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "3" to "4" in the meter production.

There are a plurality of types of execution modes (meter effect patterns) of the meter effect (see FIG. 13-5 (A)), but FIG. 13-3 (A) shows one execution mode (specifically, the meter effect pattern). An example of meter production by "MEP5") is shown.

In FIG. 13-3 (A), Ta5 to Ta6 are execution periods of the character effect. Ta5 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Ta6 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. For example, when the movable body 026SH32 operates in the order of the first state → the second state → the first state, it is the first state (Ta5) → the second state → the first state (Ta6). Further, for example, when the movable body 026SH32 operates in the order of the first state → the second state → the first state → the second state → the first state, the first state (Ta5) → the second state → the first state → the second state. State → First state (Ta6).

FIG. 13-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the game machine according to the feature unit 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-4 is an example of a variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT. In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), instead of the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A). Then, the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13-4 is selected and the variation pattern is determined. That is, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, any one of the first variation patterns # 101 to # 109 shown in FIG. 13-4. The fluctuation pattern is determined.

The first fluctuation pattern # 104 is a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach, and is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes out of reach. The first fluctuation pattern # 105 is a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach, and is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes out of reach. The first fluctuation pattern # 108 is a fluctuation pattern of a super reach jackpot, which is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach to a super reach A and finally becomes a jackpot. The first fluctuation pattern # 109 is a fluctuation pattern of a super reach jackpot, which is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach to a super reach B and finally becomes a jackpot. The reliability of the jackpot is Super Reach B> Super Reach A.

13-5 and 13-6 are explanatory views for explaining the meter effect and the like. Specifically, FIG. 13-5 (A) shows the content of the meter effect pattern (mode of increasing the meter value, etc.). FIG. 13-5 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the meter effect is executed. FIG. 13-6 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern when the set values are “1” and “2”. FIG. 13-6 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern when the set values are “3” and “4”. FIG. 13-6 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern when the set values are “5” and “6”. FIG. 13-6 (D) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect (effect of operating the movable body 026SH32) when the meter value becomes “4”.

As shown in FIG. 13-5 (A), the meter effect pattern “MEP1” is a meter effect pattern in which the number of times the meter value increases is 0. That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP1", the meter value does not increase from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (A). In the meter effect pattern "MEP2", the meter value increases once, and the meter value reaches "2" (reaches up to "2") (that is, does not become "3" or "4"). It is a production pattern. That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP2", the meter value is changed from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (A) to "2 (second)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (B). Stage) ”. The meter effect pattern "MEP3" is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases twice and the meter value reaches "3" (reaches "3") (that is, does not reach "4"). is there. That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP3", the meter value is changed from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (A) to "2 (second)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (B). It increases to "stage)" and further increases to "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (C). The meter effect pattern “MEP4” is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases once and the meter value reaches “3” (that is, does not reach “4”). That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP4", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (A) to "2 (second)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (B). It increases to "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (C) without going through "two stages)". The meter effect pattern "MEP5" is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases three times and the meter value reaches "4" (reaches "4"). That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP5", the meter value is changed from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (A) to "2 (second)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (B). It increased to "stage", further increased to "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (C), and further increased to "4 (final stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (D). Increase to.

The meter effect patterns "MEP6" and "MEP7" are meter effect patterns in which the meter value increases twice and the meter value reaches "4". Specifically, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP6", the meter value is changed from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (A) to "2" shown in FIG. 13-2 (B). (Second stage) ”, and further, without going through“ 3 (third stage) ”shown in FIG. 13-2 (C),“ 4 (final stage) ”shown in FIG. 13-2 (D). ) ”. Further, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP7", the meter value is changed from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (A) to "2 (second)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (B). It increased to "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (C) without going through "2 stages)", and further increased to "4 (final stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (D). Increase to. The meter effect pattern “MEP8” is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases once and the meter value reaches “4”. That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP8", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (A) to "2 (second)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (B). It increases to "4 (final stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (D) without going through "2 stages)" and "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (C).

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), whether or not to execute the meter effect is determined based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), when the set value is "1" or "2", the non-reach is lost (first fluctuation patterns # 101 and # 102 in FIG. 13-4). The decision rate with execution is 0%, and when the normal reach is lost (first fluctuation pattern # 103 in FIG. 13-4), the decision rate with execution is 8% and the super reach is lost (Fig. 13-). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern # 104, # 105) of 4, the determination rate of execution is 24%, and in the case of a small hit (variation pattern # 106 in FIG. 13-4), the determination of execution is possible. The ratio is 0%, and when it becomes a normal reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern # 107 in Fig. 13-4), the decision rate of execution is 16%, and the super reach jackpot (first fluctuation in Fig. 13-4). In the case of patterns # 108 and # 109), the decision rate of execution is 40%.

When the set value is "3" or "4", the determination rate of execution is 0% when the non-reach is out, and the determination rate of execution is 10% when the normal reach is out. , If the super reach is off, the decision rate with execution is 30%, if it is a small hit, the decision rate with execution is 0%, and if it is a normal reach big hit, the decision rate with execution is 0%. Is 20%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, the decision rate of execution is 50%. When the set value is "5" or "6", the determination rate of execution is 0% when the non-reach is out of reach, and the determination rate of execution is 12% when the normal reach is out of reach. , If the super reach is off, the decision rate with execution is 36%, if it is a small hit, the decision rate with execution is 0%, and if it is a normal reach big hit, the decision rate with execution is 0%. Is 24%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, the decision rate of execution is 60%.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), in the case of non-reach loss or small hit, regardless of the set value (regardless of the set value of "1" to "6". ), Meter production is not executed. In addition, when the normal reach is off, the super reach is off, the normal reach is a big hit, or the super reach is a big hit, the execution rate of the meter effect depends on the set value, and the set value is "5" or ". When it is "6", it is most easily executed, and when the set value is "1" or "2", it is most difficult to be executed.

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), the meter effect pattern is determined based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern. As an example, when the set value is "1" and the normal reach is deviated, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A), the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern "MEP1" is 50%, and the meter effect is achieved. The determination rate of the pattern "MEP2" is 40%, the determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP3" is 8%, the determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP4" is 2%, and the meter effect pattern "MEP5" ~ The decision rate for each of "MEP8" is 0%. As another example, when the set value is "3" and the super reach is out of order, the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern "MEP1" is 0% as shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). , The determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP2" is 0%, the determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP3" is 20%, the determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP4" is 20%, and the meter effect pattern "MEP4". The determination rate of "MEP5" is 45%, the determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP6" is 10%, the determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP7" is 5%, and the determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP8". Is 0%

In the example shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), regardless of the set value (regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "6"), in the case of normal reach, A meter effect pattern (“MEP1” or “MEP2”) whose meter value does not reach “3” can be determined, but in the case of super reach, a meter effect pattern (“MEP1” or “MEP2”) whose meter value does not reach “3” can be determined. "MEP2") is not determined. That is, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, regardless of the set value, if the meter value does not reach "3" in the meter production, it does not develop into super reach.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), the super reach is achieved regardless of the set value (regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "6"). In the case, the meter effect pattern (“MEP5” to “MEP8”) at which the meter value reaches “4” can be determined, but in the case of normal reach, the meter effect pattern (“MEP5”) at which the meter value reaches “4” can be determined. "~" MEP8 ") is not determined. That is, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, regardless of the set value, whenever the meter value reaches "4" in the meter production, it develops into super reach.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), the set value is "1" or "2" and the set value is "3" or "4". When the set value is "5" or "6", the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern (specifically, "MEP3" to "MEP7") when the super reach is out of order is different. There is. Specifically, when the set value is "1" or "2", the meter effect pattern ("MEP3" or "MEP4") whose meter value is only "3" is determined at a determination rate of 46% (23% + 23%). On the other hand, the meter effect pattern (“MEP5” to “MEP8”) at which the meter value reaches “4” is determined at a determination rate of 54% (42% + 8% + 4%). When the set value is "3" or "4", the meter value is determined at a determination rate of 40% (20% + 20%), whereas the meter effect pattern with the meter value stopped at "3" is determined at a determination rate of 40% (20% + 20%), whereas the meter value is set to "4". The meter effect pattern to be reached is determined at a determination rate of 60% (45% + 10% + 5%). When the set value is "5" or "6", the meter value is determined at a determination rate of 34% (17% + 17%), whereas the meter effect pattern with the meter value stopped at "3" is determined at a determination rate of 34% (17% + 17%), whereas the meter value is set to "4". The meter effect pattern to be reached is determined at a determination rate of 66% (48% + 12% + 6%).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), regardless of the set value (regardless of the set value being "1" to "6"), the super reach jackpot In the case of, the meter effect pattern "MEP8" can be determined, but in other cases, the meter effect pattern "MEP8" is not determined. That is, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, the meter effect pattern "MEP8" is a meter effect pattern in which the jackpot (super reach jackpot) is determined regardless of the set value. In the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern "MEP8" when the super reach jackpot is reached is set to a constant value (5%) regardless of the set value.

In the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, when the meter value becomes "4" in the meter effect, the accessory effect (the effect of operating the movable body 026SH32) may be executed. In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (D), it is determined whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the meter value becomes "4" based on the meter effect pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-6 (D), when the meter effect pattern is "MEP5", the determination rate of execution is 50%, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", the determination of execution is possible. The ratio is 70%, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP7", the determination rate of execution is 80%, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP8", the determination rate of execution is 100%.

That is, when the meter effect pattern is "MEP5", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" as shown in FIG. 13-5 (A). However, when the meter value changes from "3" to "4", the character effect is executed at a rate of 50%. When the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" → "2" → "4", but when the meter value becomes "2" → "4", the ratio is 70%. The character production is executed at. When the meter effect pattern is "MEP7", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" → "3" → "4", but when the meter value becomes "3" → "4", the ratio is 80%. The character production is executed at. When the meter effect pattern is "MEP8", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" to "4", but when the meter value changes from "1" to "4", the character effect is produced at a rate of 100%. Is executed.

In the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, when the meter value does not become "4" in the meter effect, the character effect is not executed (the determination rate of execution is 0%). When the meter value does not reach "4" in the meter effect, it means that the meter value does not reach "4" in the meter effect pattern ("MEP1" to "MEP4"), or the meter value reaches "4". Although it is a meter effect pattern ("MEP5" to "MEP7"), it is not when the meter value becomes "4" (when the meter value changes from "1" to "2" or "2" to "2" in "MEP5"). When it becomes "3", when the meter value changes from "1" to "2" in "MEP6", and when the meter value changes from "1" to "3" in "MEP7").

FIG. 13-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process (effect determination process for determining meter effect, accessory effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. is there. At the start of the flowchart of FIG. 13-7, the gaming state is assumed to be a normal state (mainly a non-KT state in which the first special symbol fluctuates).

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the meter effect based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 026SHS100). For example, when the set value of the effect control CPU 120 is "1" and the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (first fluctuation pattern # 103), the execution presence is determined at a determination rate of 8%, and the set value is "4". When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern # 108, # 109), the execution presence is determined at a determination rate of 50% (see FIG. 13-5 (B)).

Following step 026SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the meter effect is determined to be executed (step 026SHS101). If it is not determined that the meter effect is to be executed (step 026SHS101; NO), the effect determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the meter effect is to be executed (step 026SHS101; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the meter effect pattern based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 026SHS102). For example, when the set value is "1" and the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (first fluctuation pattern # 103), "MEP1" is 50%, "MEP2" is 40%, "MEP3" is 8%, and "MEP3" is "1". “MEP4” is determined at a rate of 2%, “MEP5” at 0%, “MEP6” at 0%, “MEP7” at 0%, and “MEP8” at 0% (see FIG. 13-6 (A)). When the set value is "4" and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern # 108, # 109), "MEP1" is 0%, "MEP2" is 0%, and "MEP3" is set. 5%, "MEP4" is 15%, "MEP5" is 45%, "MEP6" is 15%, "MEP7" is 15%, and "MEP8" is 5% (Fig. 13-6 (B)). reference).

Following step 026SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the meter effect pattern determined in step 026SHS102 (step 026SHS103).

Following step 026SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the meter effect pattern at which the meter value reaches "4" is determined (set) (step 026SHS104). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not any one of "MEP5" to "MEP8" has been determined (set). If the meter effect pattern at which the meter value reaches "4" is not determined (set) (step 026SHS104; NO), the effect determination process ends. That is, when any one of "MEP1" to "MEP4" is determined (set), the effect determination process ends.

On the other hand, when the meter effect pattern at which the meter value reaches "4" is determined (set) (step 026SHS104; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines when the meter value becomes "4" based on the meter effect pattern. It is determined whether or not to execute the character effect (step 026SHS105). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a determination rate of 50% when the meter effect pattern is "MEP5", and determines the execution presence at 70% when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6". It is determined by the ratio, when the meter effect pattern is "MEP7", the execution presence is determined at the determination ratio of 80%, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", the execution existence is determined at the determination ratio of 100% (Fig.). See 13-6 (D)).

Following step 026SHS105, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the accessory effect is executed (step 026SHS106). If it is not determined that the character effect is to be executed (step 026SHS106; NO), the effect determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the character effect is executed (step 026SHS106; YES), the effect control CPU 120 has the character effect executed (specifically, a flag indicating that the character effect is executed or a character effect). Information for controlling execution, etc.) is set (step 026SHS107), and the effect determination process is completed.

FIG. 13-8 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-8 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of a meter effect (meter effect pattern is “MEP5”) and an accessory effect in a non-KT state (normal state). In FIG. 13-8, the on-screen display of the image display device 5 is in the order of FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (D). Transition.

FIG. 13-8 (A) is a scene in which the meter value is “3” in the meter effect (specifically, a scene between Ta4 and Ta5 in FIG. 13-3 (A)). In FIG. 13-8 (A), the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV notify the meter value “3” and the level “LEVEL3”. Since FIG. 13-8 (A) is a scene before the execution of the character effect, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

FIG. 13-8 (B) shows a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as an accessory effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, Ta5 and Ta6 in FIG. 13-3 (A)). (Scene in between). In FIG. 13-8 (B), the oval image 026SH32EF01 is displayed as an effect of the accessory effect.

FIG. 13-8 (C) is a scene in which the meter value changes from “3” to “4” in the meter production (specifically, a scene between Ta7 and Ta8 in FIG. 13-3 (A)). .. In FIG. 13-8 (C), the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV notify the meter value “4” and the level “LEVEL4”. In FIG. 13-8 (C), the star image 026SHMTMAXEF is displayed as an effect that the meter value becomes MAX. The star image 026SHMTMAXEF may be displayed as a part of the meter effect, or the star image 026SHMTMAXEF may be displayed as another effect related to the meter effect. Since FIG. 13-8 (C) is a scene after the execution of the character effect, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

FIG. 13-8 (D) shows a scene that develops into super reach (specifically, a scene between Ta8 and Ta9 in FIG. 13-3 (A), a scene of Ta9, or a little after Ta9. Scene). In FIG. 13-8 (D), the SP development notification image 026SHSP that notifies the type of super reach of the development destination (super reach A in the example of FIG. 13-8 (D)) and the reliability is displayed.

When the meter value reaches MAX, the reliability of the development destination (super reach A, super reach B) or the development destination may be suggested or notified. In the example shown in FIGS. 13-8 (C) and 13-8 (D), the aspect of the star image 026SHMTMAXEF in FIG. 13-8 (C) (the number of stars is three in the example shown in FIG. 13-8 (C)) is the development destination. It suggests the reliability of Super Reach A (the number of stars is 3 in the example of FIG. 13-8 (D)).

(Regarding the character production in the second KT state of the game machine related to the feature unit 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH can execute the character effect (the effect of operating the movable body 026SH32) even in the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH). As described above, FIG. 13-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the accessory effect in the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In FIG. 13-3 (B), Tb0 to Tb1 are periods during variable display. Tb1 to Tb2 are periods during the stop display (the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed). Tb3 to Tb8 are opening periods (opening periods depending on the small hit gaming state) of the special variable winning ball device 17 that is opened in response to a small hit. Tb4 is the timing of the small hit winning (the timing when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 17). Tb5 to Tb6 are execution periods of the character production. Tb5 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tb6 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tb7 is the timing to update the total number of prize balls.

FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the character effect in the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH) and an example of the effect operation in the case of the big hit game state. In FIG. 13-9, the display on the screen of the image display device 5 is FIG. 13-9 (A) → FIG. 13-9 (B) → FIG. 13-9 (C) → FIG. 13-9 (D) → FIG. The transition is in the order of 13-9 (E) → FIG. 13-9 (F) → FIG. 13-9 (G) → FIG. 13-9 (H).

FIG. 13-9 (A) is a scene in which the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed (for example, a scene between Tb1 and Tb2 in FIG. 13-3 (B)). In FIG. 13-9 (A), the mode display 026SHMD including the characters "small hit rush mode" is displayed in the upper left, the right-handed notification image 026SHMG including the characters "right-handed" is displayed in the upper right, and the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls to be notified is displayed as 026SH130, and the second small symbol 026SH102 corresponding to the decorative symbol is displayed at the lower right. Since FIG. 13-9 (A) is a scene before the execution of the character effect, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

FIG. 13-9 (B) shows a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as an accessory effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, Tb5 and Tb6 in FIG. 13-3 (B). (Scene in between). In FIG. 13-9 (B), a small hit prize (two game balls are won in FIG. 13-9 (B)) or a small hit prize notification image 026SHKN for notifying the number of balls acquired by the small hit prize is displayed. ing. If the relationship between the small hit winning and the small hit winning notification image 206SHKN and the accessory production is organized, the small hit winning notification image 026SHKN is displayed and the character production is executed as the production corresponding to the small hit winning. It may be interpreted as. Further, it may be interpreted that the character effect is executed as the effect corresponding to the small hit prize, and the prize notification image 026SHKN is displayed corresponding to the execution of the character effect (for example, as an effect of the character effect). .. In addition, when displaying corresponding to the execution of the character effect, the name of the prize notification image 026SHKN may be a corresponding name (for example, star image 026SHMTMAXEF2 or the like).

FIG. 13-9 (C) shows a scene in which the small hit winning notification image 026SHKN is deleted and the total prize ball number display 026SH130 is updated (the number of acquired balls notified by the small hit winning notification image 026SHKN is added). For example, the scene of Tb7 in FIG. 13-3 (B)). In FIG. 13-9 (C), the total prize ball number update effect by the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF is executed. The total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF is a part of the total prize ball number update effect acting on the total prize ball number display 026SH130, but the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF can also be regarded as an effect of the character production. it can.

FIG. 13-9 (D) is a scene in which the next hold is variably displayed (for example, a scene immediately after Tb8 in FIG. 13-3 (B)). FIG. 13-9 (E) is a scene in which the jackpot symbol (for example, “777”) is stopped and displayed. FIG. 13-9 (F) is a total of notifying the current total number of prize balls and the number of balls won by the small hit prize among the total number of prize balls at the end of the second KT state in a relatively large manner. This is a scene in which the prize ball number display 026SH130D is displayed. FIG. 13-9 (G) is a scene in which the fanfare effect is being executed. FIG. 13-9 (H) is a scene in the first round.

In FIG. 13-9 (G), the current prize ball number display 026SH140 for notifying the current prize ball number and the 026SHOAZ for notifying the jackpot symbol are displayed in the upper left, and right-handed including the characters "right-handed" in the upper right. The broadcast image 026SHMG and the total prize ball number display 026SH130 for notifying the total prize ball number are displayed, and the round number display 026SH106 for notifying the current round number is displayed at the lower right.

(About the background production of the game machine related to the feature part 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH can execute a background effect that changes the background image. In addition, the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH can perform an accessory effect (an effect of operating the movable body 026SH32) as well as a background effect.

FIG. 13-10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 13-10 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the background effect and the accessory effect. FIG. 13-10 (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the active display effect and the accessory effect by the active display. Note that FIG. 13-10 (B) will be described later.

In FIG. 13-10 (A), Tc0 to Tc10 are periods during variable display. Tc10 to Tc11 are periods during the stop display. Tc0 to Tc1 are pre-reach periods. Tc1 to Tc2 are periods of normal reach. Tc2 to Tc10 are periods of super reach.

In FIG. 13-10 (A), Tc3 to Tc10 are execution periods of the background effect. Of Tc3 to Tc10, Tc3 to Tc6 are scenes in which the background image is in the first special mode (for example, yellow) different from the normal mode (for example, blue). Tc6 to Tc9 are scenes in which the background image is in a second special mode (for example, green) different from the normal mode. Tc9 to Tc10 are scenes in which the background image is in a third special mode (for example, red) different from the normal mode. In other words, Tc3 is the timing at which the background effect is started and the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow). Tc6 is the timing at which the background image changes from the first special aspect (yellow) to the second special aspect (green) in the background effect. Tc9 is the timing at which the background image changes from the second special mode (green) to the third special mode (red) in the background effect.

There are a plurality of types of execution modes (background effect patterns) of the background effect (see FIG. 13-11 (A)), but FIG. 13-10 (A) shows one execution mode (specifically, the background effect pattern). An example of background production by "MEP3") is shown.

In FIG. 13-10 (A), Tc4 to Tc5 are execution periods of the character effect. Tc4 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tc5 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tc7 to Tc8 are execution periods of the character production. Tc7 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tc8 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position.

FIG. 13-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the background effect and the like. Specifically, FIG. 13-11 (A) shows the contents of the background effect pattern (mode of change of the background image, etc.). FIG. 13-11 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the background effect is executed. FIG. 13-11 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of the background effect pattern. FIG. 13-11 (D) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image is in the second special mode (green). FIG. 13-11 (E) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image is in the third special mode (red).

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), in the background effect pattern "HEP1", the background image changes once, and the background image reaches the first special mode (yellow) (reaches "yellow"). ) (That is, it does not become "green" or "red"). That is, in the background effect by the background effect pattern "HEP1", the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow). The background effect pattern "HEP2" is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes twice and the background image reaches the second special mode (green) (reaches "green"). That is, in the background effect by the landscape effect pattern "HEP2", the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and further, the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green). ). The background effect pattern "HEP3" is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes three times and the background image reaches the third special mode (red) (reaches "red"). That is, in the background effect by the landscape effect pattern "HEP3", the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and further, the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green). ), And further changes from the second special aspect (green) to the third special aspect (red). The background effect pattern "HEP4" is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes twice and the background image reaches the third special mode (red) (reaches "red"). Specifically, in the background effect by the landscape effect pattern "HEP4", the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and further, without going through the second special mode (green). , The first special aspect (yellow) changes to the third special aspect (red).

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (B), whether or not the background effect is executed is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), when the super reach is lost (first fluctuation patterns # 104 and # 105 in FIG. 13-4), the determination rate of execution is 25%. In the case of a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation patterns # 108 and # 109 in FIG. 13-4), the determination rate of execution is 50%. On the other hand, there are cases where non-reach is lost (first fluctuation patterns # 101 and # 102 in FIG. 13-4), normal reach is lost (first fluctuation pattern # 103 in FIG. 13-4), and small hits (FIG. 13-4). In the case of the fluctuation pattern # 106) of 13-4 or the normal reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern # 107 in FIG. 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 0%. Is. That is, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, the background effect is not executed unless it develops into super reach.

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (C), the background effect pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11 (C), when the super reach is lost (first fluctuation patterns # 104 and # 105 in FIG. 13-4), the background image is "first special mode (yellow)". ) ”The background effect pattern (“HEP1”) that stops is determined at a decision rate of 70%, and the background image is “second special mode (green)”. The background effect pattern (“HEP2”) that stops is determined at a determination rate of 20%. The background effect pattern (“HEP3” or “HEP4”) at which the background image reaches the “third special aspect (red)” is determined at a determination rate of 10% (8% + 2%). Further, in the case of a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern # 108, # 109 in FIG. 13-4), the background effect pattern (“HEP1”) in which the background image stops in the “first special mode (yellow)” is set. The background image is determined at a determination rate of 10%, the background effect pattern (“HEP2”) that stops at the “second special aspect (green)” is determined at a determination rate of 20%, and the background image is determined at the “third special aspect (green)”. The background effect pattern (“HEP3” or “HEP4”) that reaches “red)” is determined at a determination rate of 70% (50% + 20%).

In the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, when the background image is in the "second special mode (green)", an accessory effect (an effect of operating the movable body 026SH 32) may be executed. In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (D), whether or not the character effect is executed when the background image becomes the "second special mode (green)" based on the background effect pattern. It is determined. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11 (D), when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the determination rate of execution is 40%, and when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the determination of execution is possible. The ratio is 60%.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, even when the background image is in the "third special mode (red)", the accessory effect (the effect of operating the movable body 026SH 32) may be executed. In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (E), whether or not the character effect is executed when the background image becomes the "third special mode (red)" based on the background effect pattern. It is determined. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11 (E), when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the determination rate of execution is 80%, and when the background effect pattern is "HEP4", the determination of execution is possible. The ratio is 100%.

That is, when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the background image is "normal mode (blue)" → "first special mode (yellow)" → "second" as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A). It changes to "special mode (green)", but when it changes from "first special mode (yellow)" to "second special mode (green)", the character effect is executed at a rate of 40% (Fig. 13-). 11 (D)). When the background effect pattern is "HEP3", as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), the background image is "normal mode (blue)"-> "first special mode (yellow)"-> "second special mode". It changes from "(green)" to "third special aspect (red)", but when it changes from "first special aspect (yellow)" to "second special aspect (green)", the character production is performed at a rate of 60%. Is executed (see FIG. 13-11 (D)), and when the change from "second special mode (green)" to "third special mode (red)", the character effect is executed at a rate of 80% (see FIG. 13-11 (D)). (See FIG. 13-11 (E)). When the background effect pattern is "HEP4", as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), the background image is "normal mode (blue)" → "first special mode (yellow)" → "third special mode". It changes to "(red)", but when it changes from "first special mode (yellow)" to "third special mode (red)", the character effect is executed at a rate of 100% (Fig. 13-11 (Fig. 13-11 (Fig. 13-11)). E) See).

(About the active display effect of the game machine related to the feature part 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH can execute the active display effect by the active display. In addition, the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH can perform an accessory effect (an effect of operating the movable body 026SH32) as well as an active display effect.

In FIG. 13-10 (B), Td0 to Td9 are periods during variable display. Td9 to Td10 are periods during the stop display. Td0 to Td1 are pre-reach periods. Td1 to Td5 are periods of normal reach. Td5 to Td9 are periods of super reach.

In FIG. 13-10 (B), Td0 to Td10 are execution periods of the active display effect (that is, a period during which the active display is displayed as corresponding to the fluctuation). Of Td0 to Td10, Td0 to Td4 are scenes in which the active display is in the normal mode (for example, gray). Td4 to Td8 are scenes in which the active display is in the first special mode (for example, green) different from the normal mode. Td8 to Td9 are scenes in which the active display is in a second special mode (for example, red) different from the normal mode. In other words, Td4 is the timing at which the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) in the active display effect. Td8 is a timing at which the active display changes from the first special mode (green) to the second special mode (red) in the active display effect.

There are a plurality of types of execution modes (active display effect patterns) of the active display effect (see FIG. 13-12 (A)), but FIG. 13-10 (B) shows one execution mode (specifically, active). An example of an active display effect by the display effect pattern “AEP3”) is shown.

In FIG. 13-10 (B), Td2 to Td3 are execution periods of the accessory effect. Td2 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Td3 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Td6 to Td7 are execution periods of the character production. Td6 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Td7 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position.

FIG. 13-12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an active display effect and the like. Specifically, FIG. 13-12 (A) shows the contents of the active display effect pattern (presence or absence of change in active display, mode of change, etc.). FIG. 13-12 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the active display effect pattern. FIG. 13-12 (C) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect during the first operation period (Td2 to Td3 in FIG. 13-10 (B)). FIG. 13-12 (D) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect during the second operation period (Td6 to Td7 in FIG. 13-10 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A), the active display effect pattern "AEP1" is an active display effect pattern in which the number of times the active display changes is 0. That is, the active display does not change in the normal mode (gray) at both the first change timing (Td4 in FIG. 13-10 (B)) and the second change timing (Td8 in FIG. 13-10 (B)). This is a display effect pattern. In the active display effect pattern "AEP2", the active display changes once, and the active display reaches the first special mode (green) (reaches up to "green") (that is, does not become "red"). It is a pattern of active display effect. Specifically, the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) at the first change timing, and remains unchanged at the first special mode (green) at the second change timing. It is a production pattern. The active display effect pattern "AEP3" is an active display effect pattern in which the active display changes twice and the active display reaches the second special mode (red) (reaches up to "red"). Specifically, the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) at the first change timing, and from the first special mode (green) to the second special mode (red) at the second change timing. ) Is a pattern of active display effect. The active display effect pattern "AEP4" is an active display effect pattern in which the active display changes once, and the active display reaches the second special mode (red) (reaches up to "red"). Specifically, the active display does not change in the normal mode (gray) at the first change timing, and does not go through the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) at the second change timing. It is a pattern of an active display effect that changes to a special mode (red).

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (B), the active display effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12 (B), the active display effect pattern (“AEP1”) is 100 when the non-reach is out of reach (first fluctuation patterns # 101 and # 102 in FIG. 13-4). It is determined by the determination rate of%. That is, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, the active display does not change in the normal mode (gray) in the case of non-reach.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 13-12 (B), there is a case where the non-reach is lost (first fluctuation patterns # 101 and # 102 in FIG. 13-4) or a normal reach is lost (the first in FIG. 13-4). When it becomes 1 fluctuation pattern # 103), when it becomes a small hit (variation pattern # 106 in FIG. 13-4), or when it becomes a normal reach big hit (first fluctuation pattern # 107 in FIG. 13-4), it becomes. The active display effect pattern (“HEP3” or “HEP4”) at which the active display reaches the “second special mode (red)” is not determined. That is, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, the active display does not become the "second special mode (red)" if it does not develop into super reach even if it reaches reach.

In the gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH, an accessory effect (an effect of operating the movable body 026SH32) may be executed during the first operation period (Td2 to Td3 in FIG. 13-10 (B)). In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (C), whether or not to execute the accessory effect in the first operation period is determined based on the active display effect pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12 (C), when the active display effect pattern is "AEP1", the determination rate of execution is 10%, and when the active display effect pattern is "AEP2", execution is possible. The decision rate of is 30%, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP3", the decision rate of execution is 80%, and when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4", the decision rate of execution is 10%. Is.

When the active display effect pattern is "AEP1", the character effect is executed at a 10% execution rate in the first operation period (Td2 to Td3), but is active in the subsequent first change timing (Td4). The display does not change in the normal mode (gray). In other words, the 10% is Gase's character production (development that the active display with the character production does not change) for the development that the active display changes if the character production is performed. It is also the execution ratio of the character production) whose active display does not change later. The same applies when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4".

In the game machine according to the feature unit 026SH, the character effect may be executed in the second operation period (Td6 to Td7 in FIG. 13-10 (B)). In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (D), whether or not to execute the accessory effect in the second operation period is determined based on the active display effect pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12 (D), when the active display effect pattern is "AEP1", the determination rate of execution is 0%, and when the active display effect pattern is "AEP2", execution is possible. When the active display effect pattern is "AEP3", the determination rate of execution is 80%, and when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4", the determination rate of execution is 100%. Is.

When the active display effect pattern is "AEP2", the character effect is executed at a 10% execution rate in the second operation period (Td6 to Td7), but is active in the subsequent second change timing (Td8). The display is also the execution ratio of the first special aspect (the green color does not change. That is, the 10% is the character effect of Gase (the character effect whose active display does not change later).

FIG. 13-13 (A) shows an example of the effect determination process (effect determination process for determining the background effect, the accessory effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows. At the start of the flowchart of FIG. 13-13 (A), the gaming state is assumed to be a normal state (mainly a non-KT state in which the first special symbol fluctuates).

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-13 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the background effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 026SHS200). For example, when the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (first fluctuation pattern # 103), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a determination ratio of 0% (see FIG. 13-11 (B)). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (first fluctuation pattern # 104, # 105), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a determination rate of 25%, and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation). In the case of patterns # 108 and # 109), execution is determined at a determination rate of 50% (see FIG. 13-11 (B)).

Following step 026SHS200, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the background effect is determined to be executed (step 026SHS201). If it is not determined that the background effect is to be executed (step 026SHS201; NO), the effect determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the background effect is to be executed (step 026SHS201; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background effect pattern based on the fluctuation pattern (step 026SHS202). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (first fluctuation patterns # 104, # 105), the effect control CPU 120 sets "HEP1" to 70%, "HEP2" to 20%, and "HEP3". 8% and "MEP4" are determined at a rate of 2% (see FIG. 13-11 (C)). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern # 108, # 109), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% for "HEP1", 20% for "HEP2", and 50% for "HEP3". “MEP4” is determined at a rate of 20% (see FIG. 13-11 (C)).

Following step 026SHS202, the effect control CPU 120 sets the background effect pattern determined in step 026SHS202 (step 026SHS203).

Following step 026SHS203, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect based on the background effect pattern (step 026SHS205). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character effect is executed when the background image is the "second special mode (green)" when the background effect pattern is "HEP2" at a determination rate of 40%. Determine (see FIG. 13-11 (D)). Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character effect is executed when the background image is the "second special mode (green)" when the background effect pattern is "HEP3" at a determination rate of 60% ( (See FIG. 13-11 (D)), the execution presence is determined at a determination rate of 80% for the character effect when the background image is in the “third special mode (red)” (see FIG. 13-11 (E)). ). Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character effect is executed when the background image is the "third special mode (red)" when the background effect pattern is "HEP4" at a determination rate of 100% ( (See FIG. 13-11 (E)).

Following step 026SHS205, the effect control CPU 120 sets whether or not the character effect is executed (specifically, a flag indicating whether or not the character effect is executed, information for controlling the execution of the character effect, etc.) (step 026SHS207). , Ends the production determination process.

13-13 (B) is an example of the effect determination process (the effect determination process for determining the active display effect, the accessory effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows. At the start of the flowchart of FIG. 13-13 (B), the gaming state is assumed to be a normal state (mainly a non-KT state in which the first special symbol fluctuates).

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-13 (B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display effect pattern based on the fluctuation pattern (step 026SHS302). For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (first fluctuation pattern # 104, # 105), "AEP1" is 10%, "AEP2" is 80%, and "AEP3" is 8%. “AEP4” is determined at a rate of 2% (see FIG. 13-12 (B)). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern # 108, # 109), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% for "AEP1", 30% for "AEP2", and 30% for "AEP3". “AEP4” is determined at a rate of 30% (see FIG. 13-12 (B)).

Following step 026SHS202, the effect control CPU 120 sets the active display effect pattern determined in step 026SHS202 (step 026SHS303).

Following step 026SHS303, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect based on the active display effect pattern (step 026SHS305). Specifically, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP1", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character effect in the first operation period is executed at a determination rate of 10% (FIG. 13-12 (C)). (Refer to), the execution presence is determined at a determination rate of 0% for the accessory effect in the second operation period (see FIG. 13-12 (D)). Further, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP2", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the accessory effect in the first operation period is executed at a determination rate of 30% (see FIG. 13-12 (C)). Regarding the character production in the second operation period, the execution presence is determined at a determination rate of 10% (see FIG. 13-12 (D)). Further, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP3", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the accessory effect in the first operation period is executed at a determination rate of 80% (see FIG. 13-12 (C)). Regarding the character production in the second operation period, the execution presence is determined at a determination rate of 80% (see FIG. 13-12 (D)). Further, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the accessory effect in the first operation period is executed at a determination rate of 10% (see FIG. 13-12 (C)). Regarding the character production in the second operation period, the execution presence is determined at a determination rate of 100% (see FIG. 13-12 (D)).

Following step 026SHS305, the effect control CPU 120 sets whether or not the character effect is executed (specifically, a flag indicating whether or not the character effect is executed, information for controlling the execution of the character effect, etc.) (step 026SHS307). , Ends the production determination process.

FIG. 13-14 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 026SH. Specifically, the left side of FIG. 13-14 (transition of (A1) → (B1) → (C1)) shows the background effect (background effect pattern is “HEP3”) and the combination in the non-KT state (normal state). It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the thing production. Further, on the right side of FIG. 13-14 (transition of (A2) → (B2) → (C2) → (D2)), the active display effect (active display effect pattern is “AEP3”” in the non-KT state (normal state). ) And an example of the production operation of the character production.

On the left side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (A1) shows a scene in which the background image is in the "first special mode (yellow)" in the background effect (specifically, FIG. 13-10 (A)). (Scene between Tc3 and Tc4). In FIG. 13-14 (A1), reference numeral 026SHHK-Y indicates a background image of the first special aspect (yellow). It is also the scene where the battle is started as a production of Super Reach.

On the left side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (B1) shows a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as an accessory effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, FIG. 13-10). (A) Scene between Tc4 and Tc5). It is also a scene where a battle is taking place as a production of Super Reach.

On the left side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (C1) shows a scene (specifically) in which the background image changes from "first special aspect (yellow)" to "second special aspect (green)" in the background effect. Is a scene between Tc6 and Tc7 in FIG. 13-10 (A). In FIG. 13-14 (C1), reference numeral 026SHHK-G indicates a background image of the second special aspect (green). It is also the scene where the battle (second time) is started as a production of Super Reach.

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (A2) shows a scene in which the active display 026SH110 is displayed in the “normal mode (gray)” in the active display effect (specifically, FIG. 13-10 (B). ) Situation between Td1 and Td2). In FIG. 13-14 (A2), the white circles in the active display 026SH110 indicate the active display 026SH110 in the normal mode (gray). In the example of FIG. 13-14 (A2), the display mode of the active display 026SH110 is the same as the hold display (reference numeral A in the figure) indicating the first hold storage.

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (B2) shows a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as an accessory effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, FIG. 13-10). (B) The scene between Td2 and Td3).

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (C2) shows a scene (specifically, FIG. 13-10 (B)) in which an action effect (effect by character image 026SHSY) on the active display 026SH110 is performed. The scene immediately before Td4).

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (D2) shows a scene in which the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the “first special mode (green)” in the active display effect (specifically, FIG. 13-10 (B), a scene between Td4 and Td5). In FIG. 13-14 (D2), the shaded circles of the active display 026SH110 indicate the active display 026SH110 of the first special aspect (green).

(Regarding the character production during the interval period of the game machine related to the feature unit 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH can execute the accessory effect (the effect of operating the movable body 026SH32) during the interval period.

FIG. 13-15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 13-15 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the character effect during the interval period of the jackpot game state. FIG. 13-15 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the accessory effect before the big hit (probability). Note that FIG. 13-15 (B) will be described later.

In FIG. 13-15 (A), Te1 to Te5 are interval periods of the jackpot gaming state. Of Te1 to Te5, Te2 to Te3 are execution periods of the character production. Te2 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Te3 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Te4 is the timing to update the number of rounds display 026SH106 (update the number of rounds display 026SH106 to the number corresponding to the round game performed after the end of the interval period).

(About the character production when a sudden big hit is made in the game machine related to the feature part 026SH)
The gaming machine related to the feature unit 026SH can execute an accessory effect (an effect of operating the movable body 026SH32) when it becomes a "2R probability variation big hit (sudden probability big hit)". In the example shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), when the variable symbol is the first special symbol, it does not become a 2R probability variation jackpot, but in the following description relating to the game machine related to the feature unit 026SH, it varies. Even if the symbol is the first special symbol, it shall be a 2R probability variation jackpot.

In FIG. 13-15 (B), Tf0 to Tf3 are periods during variable display. Tf3 to Tf4 are periods during the stop display (for example, the special symbol corresponding to the sudden jackpot is stopped and displayed). Tf1 to Tf2 are execution periods of the character production. Tf1 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tf2 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tf5 is the timing when the special variable winning ball device 7 starts to open.

FIG. 13-16 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 026SH. Specifically, the left side of FIG. 13-16 (transition of (A3) → (B3) → (C3) → (D3)) is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of a character effect in a jackpot game state. Further, the right side (transition of (A4)-> (B4)-> (C4)-> (D4)) of FIG. 13-16 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the character effect in the non-KT state (normal state).

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (A3) shows a scene in which the fifth round is performed as a round game (for example, the interval period of FIG. 13-15 (A) is the fifth and sixth rounds. Assuming that the interval period between the two is shown, it is a scene slightly before Te1 in FIG. 13-15 (A)). In FIG. 13-16 (A3), the current prize ball number display 026SH140 for notifying the current prize ball number and the 026SHOAZ for notifying the jackpot symbol are displayed in the upper left, and the right including the character "right-handed" is displayed in the upper right. The hit notification image 026SHMG and the total prize ball number display 026SH130 for notifying the total number of prize balls are displayed, and the round number display 026SH106 for notifying the current round number is displayed at the lower right.

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (B3) shows a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as an accessory effect during the interval period and is in the second state (tilted state) (for example, FIG. 13-). Assuming that the interval period of 15 (A) indicates the interval period between the 5th and 6th rounds, it is a scene between Te2 and Te3 of FIG. 13-15 (A). In FIG. 13-16 (B3), the round number display update effect by the star image 026SH32EF02 is executed. The star image 026SH32EF02 is a part of the round number display update effect acting on the round number display 026SH106, but the star image 026SH32EF02 can also be regarded as an effect of the accessory effect.

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (C3) shows the scene after the update of the number of rounds display 026SH106 in the interval period (for example, the interval period of FIG. 13-15 (A) is the fifth round and the sixth round. Assuming that the interval period between the eyes is shown, it is a scene between Te4 and Te5 in FIG. 13-15 (A).

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (D3) shows a scene in which the sixth round is performed as a round game (for example, the interval period of FIG. 13-15 (A) is the fifth and sixth rounds. Assuming that the interval period between the two is shown, it is a scene slightly after Te5 in FIG. 13-15 (A)).

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (A4) shows a scene (specifically, Tf0 in FIG. 13-15 (B)) in which a variable display is performed to be a sudden probability (two-round probability variation jackpot). The scene during Tf1). Further, FIG. 13-16 (B4) is a scene in which a special symbol (for example, “123”) is temporarily stopped and displayed (specifically, a scene slightly before Tf1 in FIG. 13-15 (B)). is there.

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (C4) shows a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as an accessory effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (for example, FIG. 13-15 (B)). The scene between Tf1 and Tf2). In FIG. 13-16 (C4), the oval image 026SH32EF03 is displayed as an effect of the accessory effect.

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (D4) shows a battle mode (high accuracy mode) after the end of the jackpot (two rounds of game state) based on the sudden probability (two rounds of probability variation jackpot). This is the screen on which the mode transition image 026SHMDIK for notifying the rush (transition) is displayed. Although not shown, the temporary stop display of the special symbol (for example, "123") is released between FIGS. 13-16 (C4) and 13-16 (D4), and the special symbol is released. It is notified that the stop of the symbol is confirmed (stop display).

(Regarding a modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 026SH)
Subsequently, a modification of FIGS. 13-1 to 13-16 will be described.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, the set value "1" or "2", the set value "3" or "4", and the set value "5" or "6" are used to make different determination ratios of whether or not to execute the meter effect. However, the method of dividing the set value that affects the determination rate of whether or not the meter effect is executed is the above-mentioned method of dividing (setting value "1" or "2", setting value "3" or "4", setting value " It is not limited to "5" or "6"). For example, the setting value "1", the setting value "2", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", the setting value "5", and the setting value "6" are used to determine the determination ratio of whether or not the meter effect is executed. It may be different, or the setting value "1", "2" or "3" and the setting value "4", "5" or "6" may be different from each other to determine whether or not the meter effect is executed. Alternatively, the set value "1", "3" or "5" and the set value "2", "4" or "6" may be used to make the determination ratio of whether or not the meter effect is executed different. The same applies to the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern.

(Modification example 2 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above explanation, the determination ratio of whether or not the meter effect is executed is different depending on the set value, but the same as the ratio of determining whether or not the background effect is executed and the ratio of determining whether or not the active display effect is executed are common to the set values. Good.

(Modification example 3 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above explanation, the execution ratio of the character effect when the meter value is "4 (MAX)" in the meter effect is different for each meter effect pattern (FIG. 13-8 (D)), but the meter effect pattern. It may be common regardless.

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, the execution ratio of the accessory effect when the meter value is “4 (MAX)” in the meter effect is the same as the set value, but it may be different depending on the set value. For example, based on the meter effect pattern and the set value, the execution ratio of the character effect when the meter value becomes "4 (MAX)" in the meter effect may be different, or simply based on the set value. Therefore, the execution ratio of the character effect when the meter value becomes "4 (MAX)" in the meter effect may be different.

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above explanation, even when the meter value is "4 (MAX)", there is a case where the character effect is not performed (Fig. 13-8 (D)), but in the meter effect, the meter value is "4 (MAX)". In the case of "4 (MAX)", the character production may always be performed.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, the accessory effect can be executed in the meter effect when the meter value is "4 (MAX)" (FIG. 13-8 (D)), but the meter value is "4 (MAX)". ) ”, Or in addition, when the meter value becomes“ 2 ”or when the meter value becomes“ 3 ”, the character effect may be executed.

(Modification example 7 of feature unit 026SH)
In the above explanation, the meter value always changes (updates) in the meter effect when the character effect is performed (Fig. 13-8 (D)), but it is active even when the character effect is performed. Just as the active display may not change in the display effect (Fig. 13-12 (C), Fig. 13-12 (D)), the meter value is displayed in the meter effect even when the character effect is performed. It may not change.

(Modification example 8 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, the determination rate of whether or not the background effect is executed is common to the set values (FIG. 13-11 (B)), but is the same as the rate of determining whether or not the meter effect is executed (FIG. 13-5 (B)). It may be different depending on the set value. The same applies to the determination ratio of the background effect pattern.

(Modification example 9 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, the execution ratio of the accessory effect when the background image is in the second special mode (green) is the same as the set value (FIG. 13-11 (D)), but it may be different depending on the set value. Good. Similarly, the execution ratio of the accessory effect when the background image is in the third special mode (red) is common to the set values (FIG. 13-11 (E)), but may be different depending on the set values. .. For example, the execution ratio of the character effect may be different based on the background effect pattern and the set value, or the execution rate of the character effect may be different based on the set value.

(Modification example 10 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, the character effect can be executed in the background effect when the background image is in the second special mode (green) and when the background image is in the third special mode (red) ( 13-11 (D), 13-11 (E)), in place of or in addition to the above, so that the character effect can be executed even when the background image is in the first special aspect (yellow). May be good.

(Modification example 11 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, even if the background image is in the second special mode (green) in the background effect, the accessory effect may not be performed (FIG. 13-11 (D)), but the background is in the background effect. Whenever the image is in the second special mode (green), the character effect may be performed. Further, in the above description, even if the background image is in the third special mode (red) in the background effect, the accessory effect may not be performed (FIG. 13-11 (E)), but the background effect In the case where the background image is in the third special mode (red), the accessory effect may be performed at any time.

(Modification example 12 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, when the character effect is performed, the background image always changes in the background effect (FIGS. 13-11 (D) and FIG. 13-11 (E)), but when the character effect is performed. Even so, in the same way that the active display may not change in the active display effect (FIGS. 13-12 (C) and 13-12 (D)), the background even when the character effect is performed. The background image may not change in the production.

(Modification example 13 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, the determination ratio of the active display effect pattern is common to the set values (FIG. 13-12 (B)), but the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern (FIG. 13-6 (A), FIG. 13-6 (B)). ) And FIG. 13-6 (C)), they may be different depending on the set value.

(Modification example 14 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above description, the execution ratio of the accessory effect in the first operation period is common to the set values (FIG. 13-12 (C)), but may be different depending on the set values. Similarly, the execution ratio of the accessory effect in the second operation period is common to the set values (FIG. 13-12 (D)), but may be different depending on the set values. For example, the execution ratio of the character effect may be different based on the active display effect pattern and the set value, or the execution rate of the character effect may be different based on the set value.

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, an example in which the character effect is executed and the active display is changed has been described (FIGS. 13-10 (B), 13-12, 13-13 (B)), but the character effect is executed and the active display is displayed. Instead of or in addition to the change of, the character effect may be executed and the hold display may be changed.

(Modification example 16 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character effect and the meter effect, the character effect starts (the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position) → the character effect ends (the movable body 026SH32 finally starts at the initial position). It was explained that (stop timing) → meter value update (change) (Fig. 13-3 (A)), but the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to start the character production → update the meter value (when the meter value becomes any of “2”, “3”, and “4”) → end the character production. Further, the meter value may be updated (for example, when the meter value becomes "4") → the character production starts → the character production ends.

(Modification example 17 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character production and the production during the small hit RUSH, it was explained that the character production starts → the character production ends → the total number of prize balls is updated by the small hit prize during the small hit RUSH. However, the execution timing is not limited to this (Fig. 13-3 (B)). For example, it may be possible to start the character production → update the total number of prize balls by winning a small hit during the small hit RUSH → end the character production. Further, the total number of prize balls may be updated by the small hit winning in the small hit RUSH (for example, when the total number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number) → the character production starts → the character production ends.

(Modification example 18 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character effect and the background effect, it was explained that the character effect starts → the character effect ends → the background image is updated (change) (Fig. 13-10 (A)). Timing is not limited to this. For example, start of character production → update background image (when the background image becomes any of the first special mode (yellow), second special mode (green), and third special mode (red)) → end of character production, May be. Further, the background image may be updated (for example, when the background image becomes the third special mode (red)) → start of the character effect → end of the character effect.

(Variation example 19 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character effect and the active display effect, it was explained that the character effect starts → the character effect ends → the active display is updated (change) (FIG. 13-10 (B)). The execution timing is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to start the character effect → update the active display (for example, when the active display becomes the second special mode (red)) → end the character effect. Further, the active display may be updated (for example, when the active display becomes the second special mode (red)) → start of the character effect → end of the character effect.

(Modification example 20 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character production and the production during the interval period, it was explained that the character production starts → the character production ends → the number of rounds is updated during the interval period (Fig. 13-15 (A). )), The execution timing is not limited to this. For example, when the number of rounds is updated during the interval period from the start of the character production (for example, when the jackpot of 10 rounds is actually reported, but the jackpot of 6 rounds is apparently notified, the 7th round is reached. When it becomes a round promotion) → It may be the end of the character production. Further, the number of rounds may be updated during the interval period → the character production starts → the character production ends.

(Modification example 21 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character production and the sudden big hit, it was explained that the character production starts → the character production ends → the special symbol is temporarily stopped (Fig. 13-15 (B)). Timing is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to start the character production → temporarily stop the special symbol → end the character production. Further, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped → the character production starts → the character production ends.

(Variation example 22 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, it has been explained that the movable body 026SH32 operates between the first state (initial state) and the second state (tilted state) as the operation of the movable body 026SH32 in the character effect, but the character fanning effect different from the character effect ( The movable body 026SH32 may be operated as another effect similar to the accessory effect, another effect that is partly common to the accessory effect, etc.). An example of the character fanning effect is an effect in which the movable body 026SH32 moves slightly from the first state to the second state and returns to the first state, and the movable body 026SH32 starts to vibrate in the first state and moves in the direction of the second state. It is a production that pretends to move and the vibration ends without actually moving in the direction of the second state. It should be noted that the effect of fanning the character may not be different from the effect of the character, but may be one aspect of the effect of the character.

(Modification example 23 of the feature portion 026SH)
The accessory in the accessory effect in the above description is the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIG. 13-1, but the accessory in the accessory effect is not limited to the movable body 026SH32. In place of or in addition to the movable body 026SH32, one or more other accessories may be used to perform the accessory effect.

(Modification example 24 of the feature portion 026SH)
For example, FIG. 13-8 shows an example in which two objects (meter value of meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, level display 026SHLV) are updated by executing the character effect, and FIG. 13-9 shows an example in which the character effect is executed. An example is shown in which one target (total prize ball number display 026SH130) is updated, but the number of targets updated by the execution of the character effect may be three or more.

(Variation example 25 of the feature portion 026SH)
FIG. 13-8 shows an example in which all of a plurality of objects (meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, level display 026SHLV) are updated by executing the character effect, but the plurality of objects are updated by executing the character effect. Some of them may be updated. For example, the meter value in the meter production is set to 10 stages ("1" to "10"), the range of the meter value "1" to "3" is LEVEL1, the range of the meter value "4" to "6" is LEVEL2, and the meter. The range of the values "7" and "8" may be LEVEL3, and the range of the meter values "9" and "10" may be LEVEL4. In this example, for example, if the character effect is executed when the meter value changes from "7" to "8", the meter value is updated from "7" to "8", but the level is "LEVEL3". If the character effect is executed when the meter value changes from "7" to "9" without being updated, the meter value will be updated from "7" to "9" and the level will also be from "LEVEL3" to "LEVEL3". It will be updated as "LEVEL4".

(Modification example 26 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, in the relationship between the character effect and the meter effect, an example in which the value (specifically, the meter value) increases as an update corresponding to the execution of the character effect is shown, but as an update corresponding to the character effect. The value may decrease. For example, the countdown effect can be executed, and the remaining number may be reduced in the countdown effect in response to the execution of the character effect. For example, the count may be "3"-> the count "2"-> the count "1"-> the character production start-> the character production end-> the count "0". In addition, the physical strength value of the enemy character may be reduced in a battle effect (for example, when the physical strength value of the enemy character becomes "0", the ally character wins and the probability change jackpot is notified). For example, the physical strength value of the enemy character may be "100"-> the physical strength value of the enemy character "1"-> the character production start-> the character production end-> the enemy character's physical strength value "0".

(Modification example 27 of the feature portion 026SH)
In the above, an example in which the effect (type of effect, production mode) of the character effect differs depending on the scene (situation) has been described (for example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8 (B), FIG. 13-9 ( The total number of prize balls updated image 026SHKSEF in C), the star image 026SH32EF02 in FIG. 13-16 (B3), and the effect of the character effect may be common regardless of the scene (situation). For example, in FIG. 13-9 (C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8 (B) may be displayed instead of the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF. For example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8 (B) and the oval image 026SH32EF03 of FIG. 13-16 (C4) have the same effect.

(Modification example 28 of the feature portion 026SH)
Instead of or in addition to the accessory effect by the accessory, an image (including the case where no darkening or the like is not displayed), sound, light, vibration, a light guide plate, wind (blower) or the like may be performed. That is, in the above, an example in which the character effect and various updates (for example, updates of meter value, level, background image, active display, number of rounds display, etc.) correspond to each other has been described. The effect of one or more of light, vibration, light guide plate, wind (blower), and the like may correspond to various updates.

(Application to other devices)
In the above description, an example of application to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but it can also be applied to a pachislot machine. For example, in a certain state (for example, during a normal game), a meter effect is executed, and in another state (for example, an ART, a chance zone where the expectation for AT is higher than in a normal game, etc.), a background effect is executed. In the meter effect and the background effect, for example, the character effect by the movable body provided around the liquid crystal part of the pachislot machine is executed, and the meter value in the meter effect is updated in response to the execution of the character effect. The background image in the background effect may be updated. Alternatively, for example, during the additional game during ART, the character effect may be executed to update the remaining game, the number of remaining sets, and the like. In addition to or in addition to the effect of the movable body, the effect of one or more of the image, sound, light, vibration, light guide plate, wind (blower), etc., and the effect of the reel (so-called reel lock effect). May be executed.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 026SH)
(Means F1)
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) and provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, the effect executing means , In the first situation (for example, during reach fluctuation, etc.), a change effect (for example, in FIG. 13-8, etc.) that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, the background image, the active display, etc.) The meter effect shown, the background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), and the display mode of the predetermined display are specific modes (for example, the meter value is Notify the first content (for example, development to super reach) that is advantageous for the player in response to "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.) In a special effect to be performed and a second situation different from the first situation (for example, a small hit prize in a small hit RUSH, an interval period of a big hit gaming state, etc.), a specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, total) A player who is different from the first content by changing the display mode of the prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc. (for example, adding the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize, adding 1 round number, etc.) A predetermined effect (for example, the total prize balls shown in FIGS. 13-9, etc.) for notifying a second content (for example, the total number of prize balls (or an increase in the total number of prize balls), progress to the next round, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. The total number of prize balls update effect by the number update image 026SHKSEF, the round number display update effect by 026SH32EF02 shown in FIGS. 13-16, etc.) can be executed, and the change effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) is executed. A specific effect (for example, FIGS. 13-8 (B), 13) in which at least a part of the effect modes are common between the time when the predetermined effect is executed and the time when the predetermined effect (for example, the total prize ball number update effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that (the character effect for operating the movable body 026SH32, etc.) shown in -9 (B) is executed.

According to the game machine, in different situations, at least a specific effect having a common effect mode is executed, and the content advantageous to the player is notified, so that the interest can be improved.

(Means F2)
The gaming machine of the means F1 is likely to be controlled into an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state), and the special state. A state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a game state is provided in a special state (for example, a second KT state), and the second situation is described in the second situation. In the special state, the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state (for example, a small hit prize in the small hit RUSH, etc.), and the effect executing means is the predetermined effect. As a result, the display mode of the specific display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, etc.) is changed in response to the game medium passing through the predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state. (For example, the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize may be added) to notify the second content (for example, the total number of prize balls).

According to the game machine, it is possible to improve the interest in a game machine that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state that is different from the advantageous state, and a special state that is easily controlled by the special state.

(Means F3)
In the gaming machine of the means F1 or the means F2, the specific effect may be an effect of operating a movable body for the effect (for example, the movable body 026SH32 or the like).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to improve the interest by using a movable body for directing.

(Means F4)
In the gaming machines of means F1 to means F3, the effect executing means can execute an effect effect that enhances the effect of the specific effect in response to the execution of the specific effect, and the specific effect in the first situation. The effect effect executed in response to the execution of the above and the effect effect executed in response to the execution of the specific effect in the second situation may have the same effect mode. As described above, for example, in FIG. 13-9 (C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8 (B) may be displayed instead of the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since there is no confusion due to different production modes, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(Means F5)
In the gaming machines of means F1 to means F3, the effect executing means can execute an effect effect that enhances the effect of the specific effect in response to the execution of the specific effect, and the specific effect in the first situation. At least a part of the effect mode is different between the effect effect executed in response to the execution of the above effect and the effect effect executed in response to the execution of the specific effect in the second situation. May be good. For example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8 (B) and the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF of FIG. 13-9 (C) are different from each other in at least a part of the effect mode.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since there are various production modes, it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means F6)
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) and provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, the effect executing means , A change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, the background image, the active display, etc.) (for example, the meter effect shown in FIGS. 13-8, etc., FIG. 13-14 (left side). The background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), etc.) and the display mode of the predetermined display are specific modes (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)" and the background image is red. A special effect that notifies the player of the first content (for example, development into super reach) that is advantageous to the player in response to the change, the active display changes to red, etc., and the identification different from the predetermined display. The display mode of the display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) is changed (for example, the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize is added, the number of rounds is added 1, etc.). A predetermined effect (for example, a general prize shown in FIG. 13-9 or the like) for notifying a second content (for example, a small hit prize in a small hit RUSH, an interval period of a big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous for a player different from the above. It is possible to execute the total prize ball number update effect by the ball number update image 026SHKSEF, the round number display update effect by 026SH32EF02 shown in FIGS. 13-16, etc., and the change effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) is executed. A specific effect (for example, FIG. 13-8 (B)) in which at least a part of the effect modes are common between when the effect is performed and when the predetermined effect (for example, a total prize ball number update effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the character production for operating the movable body 026SH32, etc., shown in 13-9 (B) is executed.

According to the game machine, the specific effect is executed and the content advantageous to the player is notified, so that the interest can be improved.

(Means F7)
It is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of executing a change effect in response to the execution of a specific effect, and the change effect is displayed (for example, For example, the first change effect (for example, the meter effect shown in FIGS. 13-8, etc., shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side)) that changes the display mode of the meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, the background image, the active display, etc. The display mode of the background effect, the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), and the specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) is changed. The second change effect (for example, the total prize ball number update effect by the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., the round number display update effect by 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.) Including, in the effect executing means, by executing the first change effect, the display mode of the predetermined display is changed to a specific mode (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image is changed to red, and the active display is displayed. By executing a special effect that notifies the player of the first content (for example, development into super reach, etc.) that is advantageous to the player in response to the change to red, etc., and executing the second change effect. The second content (for example, the total number of prize balls (or the increase in the total number of prize balls)) which is advantageous for the player different from the first content by changing the display mode of the specific display, the progress to the next round, etc. ) Is a game machine characterized by notifying.

According to the game machine, the specific effect is executed and the content advantageous to the player is notified, so that the interest can be improved.

Although the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the feature unit 026SH has been described above with reference to drawings and the like, various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Further, not all of the parts described as the embodiments are indispensable configurations, and they can be omitted as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) and an effect executing means (for example, an effect control) capable of performing an effect. The effect executing means changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, the background image, the active display, etc.) in the first situation (for example, during reach fluctuation, etc.). Change effect (for example, meter effect shown in FIG. 13-8, background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), etc.) and the predetermined display. The first display mode is advantageous for the player in response to the specific mode (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image is changed to red, the active display is changed to red, etc.). In a special effect that informs the content (for example, development to super reach) and a second situation different from the first situation (for example, a small hit prize during a small hit RUSH, an interval period of a big hit gaming state, etc.) Change the display mode of a specific display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) different from the predetermined display (for example, add the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize, add 1 round number, etc.) A predetermined effect (for example, the total number of prize balls (or an increase in the total number of prize balls), progress to the next round, etc.) that is advantageous to the player different from the first content is notified. , The total prize ball number update effect by the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9 and the like, the round number display update effect by 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16 and the like) can be executed. A specific effect (for example, a specific effect (for example) in which at least a part of the effect modes are common when a change effect (for example, a meter effect) is executed and when the predetermined effect (for example, a total prize ball number update effect) is executed. For example, a moving image showing a moving image in which a moving image (such as a character effect for operating the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIGS. 13-8 (B) and 13-9 (B)) is executed and a character image is added is displayed. A moving image effect executing means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100) capable of executing an image effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) and a first storage area (for example) for storing data related to the moving image. A storage area 91AKM11, etc.) and a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data related to character images. Etc.), a moving image control means that controls the display of moving images using the data in the first storage area (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.), and characters using the data in the second storage area. A character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) for controlling the display of an image is provided, and the data in the second storage area is designated by a first component (for example, text image designation information). The character image control means includes data on a plurality of character image components including a text image and the like and a second component (for example, a display style set by the text display setting information), and the character image control means is used for one moving image. A gaming machine in which the first component and the second component can be changed during the display period of the added character image (see, for example, FIG. 19-7) can be mentioned.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, appropriate display control becomes possible.

That is, when the change effect is executed and when the predetermined effect is executed, the specific effect having at least a part of the effect modes is executed, so that the specific effect having the same effect mode in different situations can be obtained. Since the content that is executed and advantageous to the player is notified, the interest is improved, and the first component and the second component are displayed during the display period of the character image added to the moving image by the character image control means. By changing and, it is possible to control the display appropriately by preventing as much as possible the increase in the control load for displaying the moving image and the difficulty in recognizing the character image. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to recognize the displayed character image when installed in the game hall and is rich in interest.

Further, as an example of a form of a game machine capable of improving the interest and controlling an appropriate display, a game machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) is a character image. Related to a moving image effect executing means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100) capable of executing a moving image effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) for displaying a moving image to which is added, and a moving image. Using the data of the first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing data, the second storage area for storing data related to the character image (for example, storage area 91AKM13, etc.), and the data of the first storage area, the moving image A moving image control means for controlling the display (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) and a character image controlling means for controlling the display of a character image using the data in the second storage area (for example, the video decoder 91AK143, text). The image renderer 91AK146 or the like is provided, and the data in the second storage area is set by the first component (for example, a text image specified by the text image designation information) and the second component (for example, the text display setting information). The character image control means includes data related to a plurality of character image components including (display style to be displayed, etc.), and the character image control means has a first component and a second configuration during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. A game machine whose elements can be changed (see, for example, FIG. 19-7) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

(Basic explanation that is a prerequisite for the feature part of this embodiment)
First, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, among the basic configurations and controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is a premise of the feature portion described later, the points different from those of FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above will be described. .. Except for these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is the premise of the feature portion is basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. The same is true.

FIG. 14 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine, and instead of connecting the frame LED 9 to the effect control board 12 via the LED control board 14, lamp control is performed. The main difference from FIG. 2 is that the game effect lamp 909 is connected via the substrate 9014. Further, the game effect lamp 909 is provided at a place where the frame LED 9 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area in FIG. 1, and the game effect lamp 909 is configured to include the LED.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process similar to FIG. 3 described above receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 15 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 15 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body unit and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the game board 2 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is open. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the value is for the amusement park side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

17-1 (A) and 17-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 17-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 17-2 (A) shows the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for each set value is set as a variable display result (special figure display result) of a special symbol. Is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to the one in which the first special figure and the second special figure use individual display result judgment tables, and the display result judgment common to the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may be used.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result when the game state is the probabilistic state in the case where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, 1020 to Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1383. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

In each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1 / when the set value is 4). Compared to 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, and the set value is When it is 5, it is 1/120, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/100). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state) than in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Depending on each set value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state). Is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in is not limited to 1.625 times), and the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value. The multiples of the jackpot probability in the above may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-1 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" may be different. It is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state by setting the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the variable special map is different, and the special figure display result is "small hit" regardless of the variable special map. The probability that it is determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

17-2 to 17-5 show a numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 17-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 17-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state. FIG. 17-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 17-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 17-2, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numerical values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is ". It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 17-3, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range While only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range becomes "big hit". Assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 17-4, in the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numerical values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is ". It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 17-5, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( While only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is assigned to "big hit". Has been done. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range with the hit judgment value 1020 as a reference. The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is used as the small hit judgment regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is judged as the numerical range of the value.

In each display result judgment table, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). is there. Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is the lowest, and the value of the set value is Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting). Value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 17-1 indicates the probability of becoming a big hit (ratio) and the probability of becoming a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 5 or less. It may be 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of big hits increases, the specific big hit type can be easily determined, etc.), and the pachinko game is not limited to the form. The smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game playability itself is not limited to a form that does not change, and the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit related to the set value will be described. FIG. 17-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (powered off) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, Depending on the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round indicator are lit from the start of each process, and the first hold indicator 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. are changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in the state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Perform processing according to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear process, the data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It is also possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later) of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may be executed.

In the process in the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and then the release sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the game machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without this, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The set value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be identifiable and stored regardless of whether or not the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. it can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the setting value is being changed and the power is restored, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. By executing the above, the staff of the game hall can recognize that the pachinko game machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. .. In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value. Will be.

As described above, the display result determination table included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 17-1, up to 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values regardless of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each set value is set from 1238. The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are continuous with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be in a numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1020. It suffices to judge whether or not it is within the numerical range up to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is disturbed as compared with the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variation state, the big hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination is made. Since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, the value of the random number value MR1 is set. Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probabilistic state. It suffices to judge whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. (While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It suffices to judge whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. When determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It may be determined whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

(Explanation of feature 60AK)
In the feature unit 60AK, the number of times notification effect is executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. In the number-of-times notification effect, the number of times the operation effect is executed is notified. The operation effect is an effect in which various notices, notifications, and suggestions are given when a player's movement is detected, such as a push button 31B pressing operation. The operation effects of the feature unit 60AK include a notice effect for notifying that the jackpot game state will be controlled, a value notification effect for notifying whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled to a probabilistic state, and a pachinko gaming machine 1 The setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value in is included as a feasible effect.

FIG. 18-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the feature unit 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop symbol and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop symbol is a definite decorative symbol as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is a variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or a variable indicated by the variable display result notification command. It can be determined based on the variable display content such as the display result of the display. The variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the setting by the variation pattern setting process of the special symbol process process. The variable display contents corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the display result of the variable display are "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", "super reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", "probability (probability)" It suffices to include "big hit)". When the variable display content is any of "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". When the variable display content is either "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". When the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)" and the variable display content is "super reach (loss)", the variable display content is also collectively referred to as "reach (loss)". When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" and the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", it is also collectively called that the variable display content is "big hit".

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is displayed. It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "loss". It becomes. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", when the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)", the reach effect is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "normal", and the variable display content is "super reach (loss)". In the case of "missing)", the reach effect is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "super". When the variable display content is "non-probable change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the big hit type corresponds to "non-probable change", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state is shortened. It becomes a state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the big hit type corresponds to "probability change", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state is the probable change state. Become. When the game state becomes a probabilistic state, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" increases, and it becomes easier to control the big hit game state as an advantageous state, so that the game is played more than the normal state or the time saving state. A game value that is advantageous to the player is given.

The final stop symbol is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)". To. In this case, it is confirmed by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like and referring to the left confirmed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. Among the decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to to perform the confirmation decoration. Of the symbols, the right-determined decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the confirmation decoration is performed by referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. Among the symbols, the middle-fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

The final stop symbol is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right" when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". To. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left-right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the left-right confirmed symbol is determined by referring to the left-right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. Among the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Further, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like and referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the final decorative symbol is determined. Of these, the middle fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

The final stop symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)". It is determined that they have the same (matching) decorative pattern. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot confirmation symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 It suffices to determine the decorative symbols having the same symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final decorative symbol. In the jackpot promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds the jackpot but does not recall the probability variation state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then the jackpot gaming state or the jackpot gaming state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probable change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", in step 60AKS011, it is decided whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. You may be broken. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. The player can recognize that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. It should be noted that, after the decorative symbol is re-variated in the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in step 60AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

After the final stop symbol and the like are determined, the operation effect determination process is executed (step 60AKS012). The operation effect determination process determines and sets for executing the operation effect and the number-of-times notification effect. Then, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step 60AKS013). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, an operation effect control pattern, and other notice effect control patterns. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in response to the determination result by the operation effect determination process in step 60AKS012. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the operation effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be. When the effect control pattern is determined, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. (Step 60AKS014). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step 60AKS015). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 60AKS013 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step 60AKS016). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of pending memories is "0", the active display area is not updated without updating the hold display. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step 60AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 18-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect permission condition is satisfied (step 60AKS021). The effect permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting the execution of the operation effect. For example, when the reach effect of the SP reach, which is the super reach, is executed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the effect permission condition may be satisfied. Further, it may be one of the production permission conditions that it is a high-probability high-base state in the probable change state. As described above, when the reach effect of the SP reach is executed in the high accuracy and high base state, the effect permission condition may be satisfied.

In the feature unit 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as a reach effect of super reach. Each reach effect may include an effect in which the effect modes are different from each other. Each reach effect may include an effect having a common effect mode to each other. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of executing the reach effect of the super reach is higher than the ratio of executing the reach effect of the normal reach. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of executing the reach effect of SP reach B is higher than the ratio of executing the reach effect of SP reach A. When the display result of the variable display is "missing", the ratio of executing the reach effect of the normal reach is higher than the ratio of executing the reach effect of the super reach. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the ratio of executing the reach effect of SP reach A is higher than the ratio of executing the reach effect of SP reach B. Due to the execution ratio of the reach effect, the reach effect of SP reach B was executed more than the case where the reach effect of SP reach A was executed among the reach effects of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B. In some cases, the jackpot expectation is high.

If the effect permission condition is not satisfied in step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the effect permission condition is satisfied (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence / absence and the number of operation effects are determined (step 60AKS022). The operation effect is executed according to whether or not it is executed by referring to the operation effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for the operation effect execution decision. It suffices to decide whether or not there is, and the number of executions when executing. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the operation effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 60AKS022, the presence / absence and the number of times of the operation effect are set to "no execution" in which the operation effect is not executed, "execution 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5, and the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10. It is decided to be one of "10 times execution".

Based on the determination result of step 60AKS022, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the operation effect is not executed "no execution" (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "no execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined to be a "big hit" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the number of suggested setting times is determined (step 60AKS025). The number of setting suggestion indicates the number of operation effects executed as the setting suggestion effect among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS025, the set suggestion count is determined by referring to the set suggestion count determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the set suggestion count. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the set suggested number of times may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 60AKS025, when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", the number of suggested settings is determined to be 0. When the jackpot type is "probability change", it depends on whether the operation effect is executed 5 times, "5 times" or 10 times, "10 times". Therefore, the number of suggested settings is determined at different rates.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The setting suggestion pattern is based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern, and by referring to the setting suggestion pattern determination table prepared in advance in the ROM 121, etc., for each execution number of operation effects, Of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns, one of the setting suggestion patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

When the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (Step 60AKS026; Yes), or after the setting suggestion pattern is determined in step 60AKS027, the number of value notifications is determined (step 60AKS028). The value notification number of times indicates the number of operation effects executed as the value notification effect among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS028, the number of value notifications is determined by referring to the value notification number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the number of value notifications. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of value notifications may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 60AKS028, the value is different depending on whether the operation effect is executed 5 times in the case of "5 times execution" or 10 times in the case of "10 times execution". The number of notifications is determined.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), the value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value notification pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of value notification patterns for each number of times the operation effect is executed, based on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability change". It should be done.

When it is determined in step 60AKS024 that the display result of the variable display is not a "big hit" (step 60AKS024; No), when the determination result in step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or After the value notification pattern is determined in step 60AKS030, the number of advance notice effects is set (step 60AKS031). The number of times of the advance notice effect indicates the number of times of the operation effect executed as the advance notice effect among the plurality of operation effects. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the value notification effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed. Therefore, the number of times the operation effect is executed may be set as the number of advance notice effects. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the remaining number of times the operation effect is executed, which is obtained by subtracting the setting suggestion number and the value notification number, may be set as the advance notice effect number. After step 60AKS031, the advance notice effect pattern is determined (step 60AKS032), and then the operation effect determination process is terminated. The advance notice effect pattern is determined for each operation effect by referring to the advance notice effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121 in advance based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the advance notice effect pattern. Of the plurality of advance notice effect patterns, one of the advance notice effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the advance notice effect pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 18-3 shows an example of determining the presence / absence and the number of operation effects in step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process. In step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process, the presence / absence and the number of operation effects are determined at a ratio according to, for example, the reach effect content. The content of the reach effect is determined according to the variable pattern and the display result of the variable display, and is "SP reach A (big hit)", "SP reach B (big hit)", "SP reach A (loss)", "SP reach". It suffices to include "B (loss)". When the reach effect content is either "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach B (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". When the reach effect content is either "SP reach A (loss)" or "SP reach B (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". When the reach effect content is either "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", the reach effect of SP reach A is executed as the reach effect of super reach. When the reach effect content is either "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", the reach effect of SP reach B is executed as the reach effect of super reach.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-3, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the number of times of executing the operation effect is 5 times at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is "missing". It is determined to be "5 times execution" or "10 times execution" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)" or "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 50/100. On the other hand, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "no execution" without executing the operation effect is 20/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state is increased as compared with the case where the operation effect is not executed, and the jackpot expectation is higher.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-3, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times at a higher rate than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. It is decided to "execute 10 times". For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 is 40/100. On the other hand, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 is 60/100. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 is 10/100. On the other hand, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 is 20/100. Among the reach effects of Super Reach, the jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect of SP Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of SP Reach A is executed. Therefore, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of the reach effect of SP reach B, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the reach effect of SP reach A, is increased, and the game The expectation of the person is effectively raised. Further, as the number of times the operation effect is executed increases, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state increases, and the jackpot expectation level increases.

FIG. 18-4 shows an example of determining the number of suggested setting times by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Of these, FIG. 18-4 (A) shows an example of determining the number of suggested setting times in the case of "execution 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5. FIG. 18-4 (B) shows an example of determining the number of suggested setting times in the case of “10 times execution” in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10. In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the number of suggested settings is determined at a rate according to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the jackpot type. The jackpot type includes "non-probability change" when it is not controlled to the probability change state and "probability change" when it is controlled to the probability change state according to the game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. When controlled to the probabilistic state, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a higher rate than when not controlled to the probabilistic state, and it is easy for the player to be controlled again to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state. An advantageous game value is given.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-4, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the setting suggestion effect is determined to be feasible at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". For example, in both the case of "execution 5 times" and the case of "execution 10 times", if the jackpot type is "non-probability change", the determination ratio for setting the suggested number of settings to 0 is 100/100, which is set. The suggestion effect is not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "probability change", the number of suggested setting can be determined to be other than 0 at a ratio according to the case of "execution 5 times" and the case of "execution 10 times". More specifically, in the case of "execution 5 times", if the jackpot type is "probability change", the decision ratio for setting the suggested number of settings to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio for setting the number of suggested settings to 1 is 1. It is 30/100. In the case of "10 times execution", if the jackpot type is "probability change", the decision ratio for setting the suggested number of settings to 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio for setting the number of suggested settings to 1 is 15/100. The decision ratio with the set suggestion count of 2 is 20/100, the decision ratio with the set suggestion count of 3 is 25/100, and the decision ratio with the set suggestion count of 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed is increased with the number of setting suggestion times other than 0. Further, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any of 2 to 4 which is the setting suggestion number which is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more setting suggestions can be made. The rate at which the production is executed is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than "non-probability variation", so that the jackpot type has a higher advantage than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". In the case of "probability change", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, among multiple types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", the operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is performed only in the case of "probability change", which is the most advantageous jackpot type. Become feasible. Of the multiple types of jackpot game states, within the range controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with high advantage, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. In the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "non-probability variation" of the jackpot type having a low advantage, a limit may be provided as a limit that the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Alternatively, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, in the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type having a high advantage, it is possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate. On the other hand, in the range controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "non-probability change" of the jackpot type with low advantage, there is a limit as a limit that the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a low rate. You may.

FIG. 18-5 shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. It is defined that the suggestion content and the corresponding character are different according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the set value suggested according to the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. The corresponding character is a character indicated by the effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, the suggestion content is "high expectation of odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1 corresponding to the case where the setting value is odd and the expectation is high. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, the suggestion content is "high expectation of even number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH2, corresponding to the case where the setting value is an even number and the expectation is high. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3, the suggestion content is "high expectation of high setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH3, corresponding to the case where the setting value is high setting (large value) and the expectation is high. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, the suggestion content is "the set value is confirmed to be 2 or more" and the corresponding character is the character CH4, corresponding to the case where the set value is confirmed to be 2 or more. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, the suggestion content is "the highest set value is fixed" and the corresponding character is the character CH5, corresponding to the case where the set value is fixed at the highest 6. As described above, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value has the highest advantage for the player.

FIG. 18-6 shows an example of determining the setting suggestion pattern in step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Of these, FIG. 18-6 (A) shows a determination example in the case of the final operation effect in the plurality of operation effects. 18-6 (B1) and 18-6 (B2) show a determination example in the case where the operation effect is other than the final inning in a plurality of operation effects, and FIG. 18-6 (B1) shows a setting suggestion pattern. It is a determination example when 60AKC4 is undecided as a use pattern, and FIG. 18-6 (B2) is a determination example when the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is determined as a use pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process, a setting suggestion pattern to be used is determined at a ratio corresponding to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the final operation effect to the previous operation effect. Here, in the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, the determination ratio is 5/100 when the set value is 6, and the determination ratio is 0/100 in other cases. It becomes undecidable. Therefore, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 that suggests that the setting value has the highest advantage for the player is the final operation effect. Is executed at a predetermined ratio, and is not executed as an operation effect other than the final round. As a result, of the first timing and the second timing in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed a plurality of times, the second timing, which is later than the first timing, has a higher ratio than the first timing, which is advantageous for the player. The setting suggestion effect suggesting that is the highest setting value can be executed.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-6, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100 when the set value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation effect. Further, if the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is undecided in response to the operation effect other than the final round, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100 when the set value is 2 or more. On the other hand, if the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined in response to the operation effect other than the final round, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 becomes 0/100 regardless of the set value, and the determination cannot be made. .. Therefore, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is executed once as one of the operation effects at a predetermined ratio, and is executed again or repeatedly in the same manner. Prevent being done. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is performed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not yet executed. It becomes feasible.

On the other hand, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not executed in the range in which the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. There is a limit as a limit. Further, since the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed only as the final operation effect, it is executed as the final setting suggestion effect when the operation effect that becomes the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times is executed. In the range where the setting suggestion pattern is performed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined ratio, but in the range where the setting suggestion effect is executed other than the final round, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed. There is a limitation as a limitation. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 is performed at a predetermined ratio within the range of being executed as one setting suggestion effect. While it can be executed, there is a limit as a limit that it cannot be executed within the range where it is executed as a setting suggestion effect a plurality of times. When the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the same mode is used in the range of the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3 among the setting suggestion effects by the plurality of setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5. On the other hand, in the range of the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion pattern is not executed in the same manner.

FIG. 18-7 shows an example of determining the number of value notifications in step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. Of these, FIG. 18-7 (A) shows an example of determining the number of value notifications in the case of “5 times execution” in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 5 times. FIG. 18-7 (B) shows an example of determining the number of value notifications in the case of “10 times execution” in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, the number of value notifications is determined at a ratio corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the number of suggested settings. The number of suggested setting is determined by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process to be 0 or 1 if the number of times the operation effect is executed is "5 times", and 0 if the number of times the operation effect is executed is "10 times". It is determined to be one of ~ 4.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-7, the number of value notifications is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the number of suggested settings is other than 0. For example, in the case of "execution 5 times", if the number of suggested settings is 1, the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 100/100, and one value notification effect is always executed. In the case of "execution 10 times", if the number of suggested settings is other than 0 (any of 1 to 4), the number of value notifications is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined ratio. More specifically, in the case of "execution 10 times", if the number of suggested settings is other than 0, the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 55/100, and the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 2 is 55. It is 20/100, the determination ratio with the number of value notifications being 3 is 15/100, and the determination ratio with the number of value notifications being 4 is 10/100. Therefore, when the value notification effect notifies whether or not a game value advantageous to the player is given, the setting suggestion effect can suggest the set value. The setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio when it is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type having a high advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot game states. In this case, the value notification effect notifies that the player is given an advantageous game value, and the setting suggestion effect can suggest the set value. As a result, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, but is executed in the range that the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed. There is a limit as a limit that it is not done. It should be noted that the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a high rate in the range where the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed at a low rate. There may be a limit as a limit to be feasible with.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-7, the value notification number is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification effect is not executed when the setting suggestion number is 0. For example, in the case of "execution 5 times", if the number of setting suggestions is 0, the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 70/100, and the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 30/100. is there. In the case of "10 times execution", if the number of setting suggestions is 0, the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 10/100, and the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 15/100. The decision rate with the number of value notifications being 2 is 20/100, the decision rate with the number of value notifications being 3 is 25/100, and the decision rate with the number of value notifications being 4 is 30/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the display result of the variable display is "big hit" after the execution of the operation effect is completed without executing the operation effect that becomes the setting suggestion effect or the value notification effect. ”Can be provided. Therefore, even if the number of times the operation effect is executed reaches the number of times notified by the number notification effect during the execution of the variable display and the execution of the operation effect is completed, the display result of the variable display may be a "big hit". Is left behind, so it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being impaired by the end of the operation effect.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-7, the number of value notifications can be determined to be other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "execution 5 times" and the case of "execution 10 times". Then, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of the value notification effect being executed may be increased by setting the number of times of value notification to other than 0. For example, in the case of "execution 5 times", the ratio in which the number of suggested setting is determined to be 0 is higher than the ratio in which the number of suggested settings is determined to be 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "execution 10 times", the ratio of setting suggestion times determined to be other than 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion times determined to be 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "execution 5 times", in step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, if the number of setting suggestions is 0, the ratio of the number of value notifications determined to be 0 is higher than the ratio of the number of value notifications determined to be 1 other than 0. high. In the case of "execution 10 times", in step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, even if the number of setting suggestions is 0, the ratio of the value notification number determined to other than 0 is higher than the ratio of the value notification number determined to 0. .. With such a setting, in the case of "10 times execution" in which the operation effect is executed more times than "5 times execution", the ratio that the value notification number is determined to be other than 0 becomes high, and the value notification effect is executed. The rate of being done is increased. Further, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it can be determined to be one of 2 to 4, which is the number of value notifications that is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more value notifications can be made. It suffices to increase the rate at which the production is executed.

According to steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, in the case of "execution 5 times", both the number of setting suggestion and the number of value notification are determined to be 0, and the ratio of neither the setting suggestion effect nor the value notification effect being executed is high. Therefore, in the case of "10 times execution", both the setting suggestion number and the value notification number are determined to be other than 0, and the ratio of both the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect being executed increases. In this way, as the number of times the operation effect is executed increases, the ratio of the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect executed may increase. Further, when the number of times of execution of the operation effect is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, the player's expectation for the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect can be changed according to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 18-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 60AK. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display time is changed. It may be determined that the lapse has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 18-8, it is determined whether or not the number of times notification effect period is reached (step 60AKS042). The number-of-times notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the number-of-times notification effect period is reached (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number-of-times notification effect (step 60AKS043). By controlling step 60AKS043, it becomes possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect of performing the notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

When it is determined in step 60AKS042 that it is not the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; No), or after the control of step 60AKS043 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044). The advance notice effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, advance notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The advance notice effect period corresponding to the operation effect may be predetermined so as to be later than the number-of-times notification effect period. When it is determined that the advance notice effect period is reached (step 60AKS044; Yes), control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step 60AKS045). By controlling step 60AKS045, it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a notice effect.

When it is determined in step 60AKS044 that it is not the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044; No), or after the control of step 60AKS045 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step 60AKS046). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (such as the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The reach effect period may be set to be later than the notice effect period, or may be set to include at least a part of the notice effect period. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 60AKS046; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step 60AKS047). By controlling step 60AKS047, the reach effect can be executed.

When it is determined in step 60AKS046 that it is not the reach effect period (step 60AKS046; No), or after the control of step 60AKS047 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (such as the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The jackpot notification period may be predetermined so as to be later than the reach production period. When it is determined that the jackpot notification period is reached (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute the jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). By controlling step 60AKS049, it becomes possible to notify that the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state is controlled during a predetermined period during execution of the variable display.

When it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is not the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; No), or after the control of step 60AKS049 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050). The value notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification effect period may be set to be later than the jackpot notification period, or may be set to include at least a part of the jackpot notification period. When it is determined that the value notification effect period is reached (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification effect (step 60AKS051). By controlling step 60AKS051, it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a value notification effect.

When it is determined in step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; No), or after the control of step 60AKS051 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the big hit medium effect control pattern. The setting suggestion effect period may be set to be later than the value notification effect period. When it is determined that the setting suggestion effect period is reached (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 60AKS053). By controlling step 60AKS053, it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect. When it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; No), or after the control of step 60AKS053 is performed, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern may be performed. Based on this, other control for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is performed (step 60AKS054), and then the variable display effect process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step 60AKS055; Yes), the display result is obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the waiting process for hitting the special figure (step 60AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 18-9 shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects with respect to the feature unit 60AK. Of these, FIG. 18-9 (A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 18-9 (B) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the operation-related effects including the number-of-times notification effect and the operation effect. When the variable display is started at the timing T0, the number-of-times notification effect period is reached. In the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed by the control in step 60AKS043 of the effect processing during variable display.

After that, when the number-of-times notification effect period ends at timing T1, the advance notice effect period begins. During the advance notice effect period, the operation effect to be the advance notice effect can be executed by the control in step 60AKS045 of the effect processing during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of advance notice effects is executed, each advance notice effect included in the multiple advance notice effects such as the first advance notice, the second advance notice, and so on is executed in order. .. The notice effect period is not only the period during which the pre-reach variation is performed before the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, but also the post-reach variation after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode. A part may be included in the period. By executing the operation effect that becomes the advance notice effect during the advance notice effect period, the display result of the variable display is "big hit" based on the detection of the player's movement such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B. The effect of notifying that it will be possible becomes feasible.

In the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, when the fixed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the jackpot notification is executed at the timing T2. In the variable display during effect processing, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that the jackpot notification period is reached, the jackpot notification effect can be executed by the control in step 60AKS049. At this time, the value notification production period is set. During the value notification effect period, the operation effect that is the value notification effect can be executed by the control in step 60AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of value notification effects is executed, each value notification effect included in the plurality of value notification effects, such as the first notification, the second notification, and so on, is sequentially performed. Will be executed. By executing the operation effect that becomes the value notification effect during the value notification effect period, the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state is based on the detection of the player's movement such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B. It becomes possible to execute an effect of notifying whether or not it is controlled by.

Subsequently, the special time notification is executed at the timing T3, and the setting suggestion effect period is set. During the setting suggestion effect period, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed by the control in step 60AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of setting suggestion effects is executed, each setting suggestion effect included in the multiple setting suggestion effects such as the first suggestion, the second suggestion, and so on is sequentially performed. Will be executed. Regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the player's movement such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect during the setting suggestion effect period. The effect of making a suggestion becomes feasible. After that, when the timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends and the jackpot starts, and the control of the jackpot game state is started.

In this way, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the number notification effect period, the advance notice effect period, the value notification effect period, and the setting suggestion effect period can be provided. In the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed, in which the notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed is performed. During the notice effect period, an operation effect that is a notice effect for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed. In the value notification effect period, an operation effect that is a value notification effect for notifying whether or not the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is executed. In the setting suggestion effect period, an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. When the number of value notifications is 0, the value notification effect period may not be provided, and when the number of setting suggestions is 0, the setting suggestion effect period may not be provided.

The advance notice effect period and the value notification effect period are included in a predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed. The setting suggestion effect period is included in a specific period in which the operation effect can be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period. The value notification effect period starts when the jackpot notification is performed at the timing T2. The jackpot notification by the jackpot notification effect makes it possible to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled in a predetermined period. The setting suggestion effect can be executed as an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period when the big hit notification is performed at the timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the number of setting suggestions is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Determined to be feasible. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the number of setting suggestions is other than 0, the number of value notifications is determined to be other than 0, and the value notification effect is determined to be executable. Therefore, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "probability variation" of the jackpot type having a high advantage. Elapsed of a predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state with a high advantage is performed by the value notification effect, compared to the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state with a low advantage. In a specific period later, the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode.

Even if the operation effects that are the advance notice effect and the value notification effect can be executed in the predetermined period, if these operation effects are completed, it becomes difficult to raise the expectation of the player after the elapse of the predetermined period. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period, even after the operation effect which is the advance notice effect or the value notification effect is completed. , It is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0 only when the jackpot type is "probability change", and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be feasible. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the number of setting suggestions is other than 0, the number of value notifications is determined to be other than 0, and the value notification effect is determined to be executable. Therefore, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type "probability change" having the highest advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation". , The setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period only when the notification controlled to the jackpot game state having the highest advantage is performed by the value notification effect. Become.

In general, it becomes difficult to further raise the expectation of the player after the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage is performed. On the other hand, the present invention provides a case where the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode and the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period. Even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

18-10 and 18-11 show an execution example of the operation effect. In this execution example, the number of times the operation effect is executed is determined to be "10 times execution", and the number of times of value notification and the number of times of suggestion of setting are both determined to be 2. Therefore, after the operation effect serving as the advance notice effect is executed six times, the advance notice effect period ends and the jackpot notification is performed. FIG. 18-10 (A) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD1 in the case where the big hit notification is executed by the big hit notification effect. At this time, a jackpot notification effect including the display of a message such as "battle victory!" And the display of an effect image showing the character is executed. Further, as a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", a normal symbol indicating the number "6" is displayed. As the remaining number of times the operation effect is executed, an effect image indicating "the number of remaining operations 4 times" is also displayed. When a decorative symbol of a non-probability jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to "non-probability variation", giving the impression that it is not controlled to the probability variation state. , Give to the player.

FIG. 18-10 (B) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD2 when the value notification effect period is started. At this time, a message suggesting 4 which is the remaining number of operation effects is displayed as the number of times the operation effect that is the value notification effect can be executed. FIG. 18-10 (C) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD3 when the first value notification effect is started. In this case, by displaying the effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's operation such as the pressing operation on the push button 31B is promoted. FIG. 18-10 (D) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD4 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the player's action of pressing the push button 31B, the notification that the jackpot type is "probability change" is not performed, so that the probability change state is obtained after the end of the jackpot game state. A failure notification effect that gives the impression of being uncontrolled is executed. In addition, as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations 3 times" is displayed.

FIG. 18-10 (E) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 5 when the second value notification effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first value notification effect is started, an effect image showing the push button 31B is displayed, and the player's action such as a pressing operation on the push button 31B is promoted. FIG. 18-10 (F) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 6 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the player's action of pressing the push button 31B, the notification that the jackpot type is "probability change" is performed, so that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game state. A success notification effect is executed to notify that the control is performed. In addition, as a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "middle" and "right", the normal symbol indicating the number "6" is changed to the probabilistic symbol indicating the number "7". It is changed and displayed. When a decorative symbol of a probability variation jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variation symbol is displayed, the player can control the jackpot type to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "probability variation" and control the probability variation state. Becomes recognizable. In addition, as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations 2 times" is displayed.

FIG. 18-10 (G) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 7 when the setting suggestion effect period is started. At this time, along with the notification of the special time, a message is displayed to notify the remaining number of operation effects of 2 as the number of times the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed.

FIG. 18-11 (A) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD8 when the first setting suggestion effect is started. In this case, by displaying the effect image indicating the push button 31B together with the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is promoted. FIG. 18-11 (B) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 9 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion effect. In this case, as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, an effect image showing the corresponding character CH2 is displayed. By displaying the characters CH1 to CH5, which are the corresponding characters of the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the advantage according to the character indicated by the displayed effect image can be obtained. , The player becomes recognizable.

FIG. 18-11 (C) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 10 when the second setting suggestion effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first setting suggestion effect is started, the player displays an effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect and an effect image showing the push button 31B, and presses the push button 31B. The operation of is prompted. FIG. 18-11 (D) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 11 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion effect. In this case, as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, an effect image showing the corresponding character CH4 is displayed. FIG. 18-11 (E) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 12 when the setting suggestion effect period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 18-11 (F) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 13 in the case where the decorative symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination, which is the final decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variable display. After that, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the control of the big hit game state is started.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, instead of the determination example shown in FIG. 18-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the setting suggestion effect is performed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "probability variation". May be determined to be feasible. In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-4, the number of suggested setting may be determined by the ratio of the case where the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and the case where the jackpot type is "probability variation". In this way, if the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than the "probability change" when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", the jackpot type has a lower advantage than when the jackpot type is "probability change". In the case of a certain "non-probability change", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability change" or "probability variation", the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", which is the least advantageous jackpot type, and the operation effect is a setting suggestion effect. May be feasible. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states having different advantages, it may be possible to control a jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is different, instead of the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "probability variation". For example, the jackpot type according to the number of rounds, such as "4R" where the number of rounds is 4, "6R" where the number of rounds is 6, "8R" where the number of rounds is 8, and "10R" where the number of rounds is 10. May be provided. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can obtain increases, so that the player's advantage may increase. The value notification effect may be an effect of notifying the number of prize balls that the player can obtain according to the number of rounds. Even in such a case, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage by the value notification effect is generated according to the control to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage. When it is performed, the setting suggestion effect is set as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification controlled to the jackpot game state with low advantage is performed. It should be made feasible. In addition, among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, the notification is controlled to the jackpot gaming state having the highest advantage by the value notification effect according to the control to the jackpot gaming state having the highest advantage. Only in the case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

On the other hand, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, the notification is controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a low advantage by the value notification effect according to the control to the jackpot gaming state having a low advantage. In this case, the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period at a higher rate than the case where the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage is performed. You may. Alternatively, in response to being controlled to the jackpot gaming state having the lowest advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, the value notification effect is used to notify the jackpot gaming state to be controlled to the lowest advantage. Only in the case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

In addition, the advantage of the player in a plurality of types of advantageous states may be different depending on whether or not an arbitrary game value is given and the content of the game value to be given. For example, when the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be different by changing the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time reduction state. Alternatively, when the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the player's advantage may be different by changing the jackpot probability in the probability change state. The advantage of the player may be different by changing the number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled by the normal state. Further, the value that can be given by the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the game value related to the execution of the game itself, for example, the execution of the reach effect that becomes the super reach, the display of the effect image that becomes the premier character, and the premier music. Part or all of performing a particular effect, such as playing a sound or displaying an image showing a two-dimensional code, may be included. The image showing the two-dimensional code may include information that enables the player to acquire predetermined digital contents by taking a picture with a terminal device (mobile terminal) possessed by the player. The value that can be imparted to the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include effect points that are different from those that perform a specific effect.

The number of executions of the operation effect is not limited to the case of "execution 5 times" which is 5 times and the case of "execution 10 times" which is 10 times. It suffices if it can be set. Also in this case, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is large, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the number of times the operation effect is executed is small. In addition, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is large, it is possible to determine the number of setting suggestions that is not determined when the number of times the operation effect is executed is small, or the ratio of executing more setting suggestion effects is increased. You may.

Instead of the determination example shown in FIG. 18-6, restrictions may be provided so that the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Further, regardless of whether or not it is the final operation effect and whether or not the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined, the setting suggestion pattern is determined at a common determination ratio, and then a predetermined difference is determined. When the replacement condition is satisfied, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern to limit the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern from being executed. Alternatively, for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern may be repeatedly executed.

It may be possible to determine the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 at different ratios depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions, as well as whether or not it is the final operation effect. When the number of setting suggestions is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the number of setting suggestions is small, and the definite notification that the set value is 6 may be easily executed. Alternatively, when the number of setting suggestions is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a lower rate than when the number of setting suggestions is small, and it may be difficult to execute the definite notification that the set value is 6. ..

The setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be restricted so that it is not executed as the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern until a predetermined release condition is satisfied after being executed once. .. For example, in the period in which the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, the release condition is not satisfied, and after the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the same setting suggestion pattern is executed. It may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by. When the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed, it is confirmed that the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the setting value has a high advantage for the player. , It is possible to increase the rarity of such a setting suggestion effect and improve the game entertainment.

Instead of the setting suggestion effect, or when an operation effect that is a notice effect is executed together with the setting suggestion effect, the suggestion regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be performed. For example, as a plurality of advance notice effect patterns, a advance notice effect pattern in which the determination ratio differs depending on the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 or a advance notice effect pattern that can be determined only when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a specific value. It may be provided. More specifically, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect pattern for notifying the message of "reliability 66%", and the determination rate of the advance notice effect pattern is increased. As described above, it suffices that the determination value in the advance notice effect pattern determination table is assigned to a plurality of advance notice effect patterns. By executing the operation effect that is the advance notice effect so that the suggestion regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the advance notice effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in the predetermined period before the specific period. It becomes. In addition to the operation effect that is the advance notice effect, when the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, the suggestion regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made. By executing an operation effect that serves as a value notification effect so that a suggestion regarding a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the value notification effect is provided as an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a predetermined period prior to the specific period. It becomes feasible. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to pay attention to the operation production that gives notice and notification.

In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 18-2, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of value notifications may be determined and then the number of suggested settings may be determined. In this case, when the number of value notifications is determined to be other than 0, the number of setting suggestions can be determined, and when the number of value notifications is determined to be 0, the number of setting suggestions is not determined and the setting suggestion effect is produced. May not be executed. In this way, when it is notified whether or not the game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, it is sufficient that the setting suggestion effect can suggest the set value.

The setting suggestion effect is not limited to the effect of suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, an effect of suggesting whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern determined at a high rate is executed so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. , The production can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

At least a part of the predetermined period, or a part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the operation effect as the advance notice effect may be executed, but the operation effect as the value notification effect or the setting suggestion effect may not be executed. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the value notification effect is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). Or an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect may be made feasible. The operation effects such as the advance notice effect, the value notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed without executing the value notification effect.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be executed based on the detection of the tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is executed, the effect mode is such that the player has a higher advantage than when the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed. Good. For example, in the setting suggestion effect using the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, the setting suggestion is such that the determination ratio of the operation effect using the push button 31B is 0/100 and the determination ratio of the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is 100/100. The determination value in the pattern determination table may be assigned to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The configuration for detecting the movement by the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like, and may be, for example, a jog dial capable of a rotation operation, or a touch operation or a pressing operation like a touch panel. It may be possible. Further, a sensor capable of detecting an arbitrary operation not limited to the instruction input action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. The result of shooting a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that an arbitrary motion can be detected as a predetermined operation. That is, the configuration for detecting the motion by the player may be any configuration that can detect the motion of the arbitrary object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

The various restrictions may be any range or limitation as long as they do not deviate from the achievement purpose, the problem to be solved, or other purposes of the present invention. The range of the limitation may be a condition that makes the presence / absence, the ratio, and other quantities different for the execution of processing, control, and operation, and the limit of the limitation is the presence / absence, ratio, and other quantity for the execution of processing, control, and operation. The content may be different (for example, when stopping, reducing, reducing, etc.).

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 60AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, from 1 to 6. Setting means such as CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of FIG. 17-13, which can be set to any of the values of, and game control means such as CPU 103 that can proceed with the game. Based on the detection of the player's movement, for example, the processing of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, and 60AKS053 shown in FIG. 18-8, which can execute motion effects such as a notice effect, a value notification effect, and a setting suggestion effect, is executed. The process of step 60AKS043 shown in FIG. 18-8 is executed, for example, the operation effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 and the notification effect corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed, for example, the notification effect such as the number of times notification effect can be executed. A notification effect execution means such as a CPU 120 for effect control is provided, and in the execution pattern of the operation effect by the operation effect execution means, the operation effect of the number of executions indicated by the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period, for example, a variable display. The first execution pattern, such as when the result is not a "big hit" or when the determination result of the set suggestion number is 0, and the operation effect a number of times less than the number of executions indicated by the notification effect are executed within a predetermined period. , The operation effect of the remaining number of executions is executed after the elapse of the predetermined period, for example, the second execution pattern such as the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the determination result of the set suggestion number is other than 0 is included. As shown in FIGS. 18-5, 18-6, and 18-9, for example, the motion effect executing means performs the motion effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period according to the suggestion effect mode for suggesting the setting of the setting means. It is feasible. As a result, the production can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved.

An advantageous notification means such as an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. 18-8, which can notify that the control to an advantageous state is performed in a predetermined period, is provided. When the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" in the process of step 60AKS024 shown in 18-2, and the part for executing the process of step 60AKS025 is notified by an advantageous notification means, the predetermined period of time In a specific period after the lapse of time, it may be possible to execute the motion effect of the suggestion effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to pay attention to the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

The advantageous states include a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" and a second advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "probable change" which is higher than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states including the above, and the operation effect executing means is notified that it is controlled to the second advantageous state by the advantageous notification means, for example, as shown in FIG. 18-4. May be able to execute the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode at a higher rate than when the advantage notification means is notified that the first advantageous state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

The advantageous states include a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" and a second advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "probable change" which is higher than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states including, and the motion effect executing means is an advantageous notification means, for example, when the jackpot type "non-probable change" and "probable change" shown in FIG. When the notification of being controlled to the first advantageous state is performed by, it is suggested in a specific period at a higher rate than when the notification of being controlled to the second advantageous state by the advantageous notification means is performed. It may be possible to execute the operation effect of the effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

As an advantageous state, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states such that the degree of advantage for the player is different, for example, the jackpot type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change". For example, as shown in FIG. 18-4, it is possible to execute the motion effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period only when the advantage notification means notifies that the control is controlled to the most advantageous state. You may. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

The motion effect executing means performs an motion effect by any of a plurality of modes as the motion effect of the suggestion effect mode, for example, when the number of setting suggestions shown in FIG. 18-4 is determined to be one of 2 to 4. , It can be executed a plurality of times in a specific period after the elapse of a predetermined period, and restricts the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode from being executed by the same mode included in the plurality of modes, for example, step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 18-2. A limiting means such as an effect control CPU 120 for determining a setting suggestion pattern at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 18-6 may be provided in the process of. As a result, the production can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved.

In a specific period after the elapse of a predetermined period, the motion effect executing means performs the motion effect of the suggestion effect mode at the first timing such as the execution timing of the first suggestion and later than the first timing, for example, the second suggestion. It can be executed at the second timing such as the execution timing of the above, and as shown in FIGS. 18-4 and 18-6, for example, an operation effect suggesting that the setting value has the highest advantage for the player. May be feasible at the second timing at a higher rate than at the first timing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to pay attention to the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

The motion effect executing means may be able to execute the motion effect that gives a notice that the motion effect is controlled to an advantageous state in a predetermined period according to the suggestion effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to pay attention to the motion production that gives the notice.

(Explanation of feature units 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 19-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 with respect to the feature units 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 19-1, various circuits such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the input circuit 91AK121, the memory controller 91AK122, the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM91AK124, the RAM91AK125, and the watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the effect control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 includes a voice decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control command received from the main board 11, thereby performing image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, and other decorations. An integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of an effect using a part or all of a plurality of effect devices, such as an LED for effect and a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32, is integrated on one chip may be used. .. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 are the effect control microprocessors. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the effect data memory 91AK123 in response to the request signal supplied from the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 stores in advance the effect data that can be used to execute the effect using the effect device, such as various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 5. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data which is sprite image data which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It suffices if it is prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, or the like, and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. I just need to be there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the audio data used for the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member 32 and the like. The effect data memory 91AK123 may be any non-volatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND flash memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten. However, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device in a normal use state in which the progress of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores a computer program for effect control, fixed data, and the like. The RAM 91AK 125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time elapses after the start time (timeout time) and a time-out occurs, a time-out signal is used as a time-out signal. Generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. When the timeout signal is generated, the CPU 91AK131 is reset, and the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 is restarted.

In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 91AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the ROM 91AK 124, the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for performing various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data. A part or all of the effect control pattern and the effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of instructions in which a series of transfer instructions to be executed by VDP91AK132 are described according to the order of image processing and the like. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the effect using such a display list, it is sufficient that the electric components for the effect can be controlled in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used for controlling electrical components for production. The CPU 91AK131 may be able to read the program or data stored in the RAM 91AK 125 in a reading time shorter than the reading time of the program or data stored in the ROM 91AK 124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric components according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124. The effect control processing includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU 91AK 131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK 124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU 91AK 131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK 125 and temporarily stores them, and various types in which the CPU 91AK 131 is temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK 125. The variable data read process for reading the variable data of the above, the reception process for the CPU 91AK131 to receive input of various signals from the outside, the transmission process for the CPU 91AK131 to output various signals to the outside, or a part or all of these processes are included. May be good.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls to execute variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction unit (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, the display control instruction group included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The voice control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 inputs the moving image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and outputs the video data and the audio data separately. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and outputs the data. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read the compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode the character image data, and then supply the character image renderer 91AK145 or the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of them, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. You may. The character image renderer 91AK145 is input with character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and is written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the character image data in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the character image renderer 91AK145 executes an image conversion process for displaying the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. Good. In the text image renderer 91AK146, text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 are input, and are written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the text image data in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the text image renderer 91AK146 executes an image conversion process for displaying the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132. The VRAM 91AK147 may be provided with, for example, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, a CG buffer, and the like. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display colors of characters and texts are defined when the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is executed, and temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK 147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK 147, such as the built-in memory 91AK 136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster) created by VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. Data) etc. In the frame buffer, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are stored. The virtual display area to be used may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. As a result, the data may be output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored. The display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored in the image drawing area. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Each time the V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). The drawing process is performed, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The voice processing circuit 91AK133 generates a voice signal that enables voice output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The voice decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded voice data to generate a voice signal. Further, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123 or ROM91AK124. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 may generate a voice signal by decompressing and decoding the voice data read from the voice data memory based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132, and outputs the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for production such as a movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP132, and outputs the motor control data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used for controlling the progress of the effect.

FIG. 19-2 shows a configuration example of the storage area for effect control according to the storage content. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, the built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of them. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores the effect control program and the effect control management data, and functions as a management area for the effect control program and the like. For example, table data, which is configuration data of various tables prepared by CPU 91AK131 of the microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting an effect control pattern, and the like are stored as management data in a storage area. It suffices if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a management area for display control programs and the like. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table in which a procedure for displaying the effect image, etc. are defined are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. I just need to be there. The image processing program may include a program that converts image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program that generates a text image in a bitmap format based on the text described using the character code and the font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image-related data including moving image data and related data. For the moving image data, image compression information including a reference image and a predicted image is generated by compression coding processing such as motion compensation prediction coding using a multi-frame image as an original image, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multi-encoded stream may be used. The moving image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is a mode and a form when the moving image is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and the display layout of the moving image. The table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image-related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be any still image data in which an arbitrary character image showing a plurality of types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and a data file constituting the character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is a mode or form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image-related data including text image data and its related data. The text image-related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect contours for each character used to display a text image. is there. The text image-related data may include vector font data or stroke font data in place of the outline font data or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into glyphs of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line and curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. .. Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is scaled up or down. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, and an arbitrarily set word such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of a part or all of them. Anything that can recognize the unit of Further, the text image data may indicate a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, or the like. It may indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data may be stored in either the ROM 91AK 124 or the built-in memory 91AK 136 because the VDP 91AK 132 is used when executing the image processing program. As described above, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123 and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in a part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 13 may include table data and a data file constituting the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is a mode and form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores voice-related data including voice data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 can be reproduced and output as the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses, unlike the audio that is reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the effect of the moving image display. Anything that does. The voice-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 14 may include table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table. The voice output process table is used for voice control processing in which the sound effects such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the elapsed time as the production in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files constituting the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as the effect control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes, for example, conversion processing of video data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of a moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the moving image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. When the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes, for example, a conversion process of text image data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of the text image, and writes the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147 and stores it. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled by using the text image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 19-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and the text display process table according to the reach effect content. In the reach effect of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect of displaying the moving image is executed and the period in which the effect of displaying the text image is executed may be partly or wholly the same period or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined, for example.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 19-3, the moving image data is determined to be one of 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 according to the reach effect content, and is determined to be one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12. Will be done. Of these, the moving image data is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with the reach effect content. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, in the text display process table, there are cases where it is possible to determine in common even with different reach effect contents, and there are cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", it cannot be determined. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", it cannot be determined. As described above, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach B is executed.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. It can be displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD02 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD12. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 19-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 19-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used corresponding to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 19-4 (A2) shows the reach of SP reach A. A configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the effect is shown. FIG. 19-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a single text display period in which the text image designation information and the text display setting information are set in association with each other. For the text display period, a start time for starting the display and an end time for ending the display are specified for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image in the reach effect, or by using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. You may. However, if the display content of the text image is highly relevant to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time in the text display period will be used using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image was started. It is desirable to specify. Since the elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the reach mode, the moving image even if it is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the reach mode. The timing at which the display of is started may be different. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time in the text display period are specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing. The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the interlocking between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information specifies the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses an arbitrary character code such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.), and the content of the text image to be displayed. May be the information that identifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies that the display mode of the text image can be set by the display style information, the display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set as long as the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 19-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, FIG. 19-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 19-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. .. FIG. 19-5 (B) shows a display control example in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at the timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the timing T10 is used. At some point, the display of the moving image starts.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 19-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 19-5 (A1), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. The timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by. The timing T08 is a timing that arrives after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 19-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 19-5 (A2), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly in common. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, a part of the first text display period is common to the second text display period, and a part of the other period is common to the third text display period. As described above, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, in the second text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period, and in the third text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period. As described above, the second text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period, and the third text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. As described above, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may include the entire period in the second text display period, and the second text display period may include the entire period in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. This makes it possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, as the third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such a setting, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. .. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated for the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image designation information is displayed on the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is such that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed depending on the determination result of the text display process table. It will be possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text from the timing T02 to the timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and the text is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. Image designation information 91 The text image designated by AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed is different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods, so that the text image can be displayed. The components can be changed. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed may be different in the entire plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. Good. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, if the start time, end time, and part or all of the period length are different for multiple text display periods, depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You may let me. In this way, a part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to the moving image of 1 may be changed, or a part or all of the text image added to the moving image of 1 can be changed. May be.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 19-4 (B), as shown in FIG. 19-5 (B), the text image designation information 91AKA21 is in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 in the text display period from the timing T13 to the timing T14. Is displayed. The timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. After the timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T16 to the timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T18 to the timing T19. Display the text image specified by.

FIG. 19-6 shows a specific example of the text display setting information. The text display setting information is configured to include data corresponding to a plurality of fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. In the fontFamily field, the font family that is the font type can be set for the font of the characters included in the text image. In the fontSize field, you can set the font size that is the size to display the text image. The fontWeight field allows you to set the thickness of the characters contained in the text image. In the color field, the display color of the characters included in the text image can be set. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in text images such as standard, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters contained in a text image, such as right-justified, centered, and left-justified. The textDecoration field allows you to set decorative displays that are added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 19-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 19-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 19-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 19-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Can be displayed on. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. It is displayed with the displayed display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 was set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05 is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 as the third text display period included in the first text display period. When the text image is displayed with the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and when the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed with the text display setting information 91AKA13. Or may be displayed in the display layout. With such a setting, in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the designated information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA02. On the other hand, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated by being added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed with the displayed display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB02 It can be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB03 It may be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is set to display the text, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. It may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the information 91AKB13. As described above, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is used. In addition to displaying in one display mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to a second display mode different from the first display mode and displayed. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. In addition to displaying, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode and displayed. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition to displaying in a mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, a part of the text image can be changed to a display mode different from that of the other text images and displayed. Further, after displaying the text image of the second display mode together with the text image of the first display mode, the text image of the second display mode is changed to the text image of the third display mode and displayed, and the second display. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 19-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 19-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image designated by the designated information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA01. Further, in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. As a result, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Display it. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Thereby, different text images can be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display it. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data based on the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Let me. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least a part of the text image designation information and the text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information. , Part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 19-6 (A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from # FF0040 to # 4000FF by the color field. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 19-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 19-4 (A2), text is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image of the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 19-4 (B), the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. For example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changed depending on the reach effect content or the like even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. .. In this case, whether or not to change the display color of the text image at a different rate depending on whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, for example, whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK131 even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that the increase in data capacity and the increase in processing load can be prevented. , Various text images can be displayed. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image is easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image is difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by, for example, the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than that when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be good if it could be changed as follows. This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to see while suppressing the player's discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 19-7 shows an execution example of an effect in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, the text image is displayed according to a plurality of text display periods in accordance with the moving image display when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. In the reach effect of SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the moving image is displayed. A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a production display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete against each other is performed. Until the timing of notification, the contents of the common effect display may be used. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is high. Will be higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKAD11 shown in FIG. 19-7 (A) is an effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponds to the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text image designation information 91AKA01. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates (300, 30) as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. A typeface whose font family is classified into Gothic typeface called AA_gothic, font size is 48px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, and text image display color gradually changes from # FF0040 to # 4000FF. The components in the text image display are controlled so that the background display color is # CCF0F0, the font style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the font alignment is centered, and the font decoration is unset. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes an image conversion process for displaying a text image in a display mode including a display style and a display layout specified by the text display designation information. Good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 19-7 (A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image is the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display mode set by. In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins ..." specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 has a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA02, for example, the origin coordinate is (250,600). ), Font family is BB_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 36px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is #FFFFFF, background display color is # 220C0C , The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the normal font corresponding to the normal character style, the character arrangement is left-justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 19-7 (B1) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance !!" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB03. Typeface classified as Gothic typeface called CC_gothic, font size is 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is # 000000, background display color is #FFFFFF, character style is normal The components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal font, character placement is centered, and character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has a font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. The color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed, a part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. ..

The effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 19-7 (B2) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "super hot" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. Typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 72px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, text image display color is gold corresponding to "gold", background display color is # 000000, The components in the text image are controlled so that the character style is the normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is the center, and the character decoration is the effect display setting for golden display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, etc. The character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed are individually set among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. It may be possible. Compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all the settings of this text image, including the origin coordinates, have been changed. In this way, when the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed, all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if 1 data is changed and displayed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, 1 data is displayed. Other data associated in advance may also be modified and displayed. For example, when the display color of the text image is changed to the gold color corresponding to "gold" and displayed, it is sufficient that the character decoration can be changed to the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold and displayed.

As for the display color and background display color of the text image, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, the brightness (gradation) is any one of "0" to "255". It can be set in 256 steps so that it becomes a level. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field has a data format common to the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying the character image, for example. I just need to be there. Further, the origin coordinates when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a data format common to the field data constituting the origin field in, for example, the character display setting information. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common data with the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed by using the information common to the effect image different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be any unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Further, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, the character size may be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is different from the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, by using unique information that is not used in the effect image different from the text image. May be good. As a result, it is possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display various text images.

When, for example, a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration becomes the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold. When "gold" is set by the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set by the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and display gold around the text image. It is possible to add an effect image for display. In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 19-7 (B2), when a specific text image indicating a line of "super hot" is specified by the text image designation information 91A13, the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style of, a specific text image showing the line "super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. .. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect of the moving image display using the moving image data is executed, the player can easily recognize the effect content by adding the effect of the text image display using the text image data. Therefore, it becomes easy to provide information that is different from the content of the production. In this case, in the data configuration in which the text image data is compressed, encoded, and multiplexed as the video data included in the moving image data, the outline is displayed in the text image display using the text image data that has been decompressed and decoded and reproduced. May cause problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality. Further, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It will be easier. When a special compression coding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In the feature units 91AK and 92AK, when the effect of moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily display various text images and execute them with high quality, and it becomes easy for the player to recognize the contents of the production. In addition, since the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data stored separately from the moving image data is added, the data capacity of the moving image data increases and the processing load of the image data increases. , Appropriate display control that can be prevented as much as possible becomes possible.

The text image display added to the moving image display using the moving image data is controlled by using the text display process table. Similarly, the moving image display is controlled using the moving image display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as the second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for this purpose. As a result, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image of 1, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component are changed according to the elapsed time and the like. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to the moving image of 1, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the data capacity and processing load can be increased. Appropriate display control is possible so that growth is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 was used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 was executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is displayed when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. It is possible to add the used text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, to a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding a text image using common data to multiple moving images and making it possible to display, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the increase in data capacity and processing load is prevented. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images indicating the line "super hot" are provided by the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. The display style and the like may be changed and displayed at the timing of. A text image showing the line "super hot" corresponds to a specific first component group, for example, a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high rate of becoming a "big hit". It may be a text image. In this way, when displaying the specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 19-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing a line of "super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is set. In the display period, the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. As the display style of the text image common to the text display period up to timing T04 and timing T05, the font family is classified into the Mincho typeface of DD_mincho by the fontFamily field, and the font size is 72px by the fontSize field. It is set.

FIG. 19-8 (A) shows a case where a text image of a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 19-8 (B) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed by, for example, a gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 19-8 (C) shows a case where a text image of a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. Will be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the text decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the outline in the text image It is possible to add an effect image around the text image and display it by displaying the display color of or shadow, the boundary display by bevel or embossing, the layer style that adds brilliance, or a combination of some or all of them. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, by adding an effect image around the text image and displaying it, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the golden display, and the game for displaying the text image. It is possible to enhance the impression of a person.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins ...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 displays a part of the text image "character" in the text information indicating the line "If this character wins ..." with a display color and background display of the text image different from the other parts. You can set the color and character style.

FIG. 19-9 shows a display example in which a part of the text image has a display style different from that of the other parts. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed so that the display color is white, the background display color is black, and the character style is italic, and the other part of the text image is displayed in black. Display so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. In the text display setting information 91AKB02, the display color of the text image corresponds to #FFFFFF by the color field, and the background display color corresponds to black by the backgroundColor field, corresponding to a part of the text image called "character". The fontStyle field sets each italic whose character style corresponds to italic. Further, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to the other part of the text image, the display color of the text image is black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, the background display color is white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field is used. Set the normal font whose character style corresponds to normal. As a result, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced by displaying a part of the text image in a display style different from that of the other parts.

In the display of a text image constituting a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a part to be displayed in a display style different from other parts may be changed according to the progress of the effect by the moving image display. For example, when a musical piece is played or a dialogue is played back along with a moving image display, a part of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from other parts such as a specific color display or a highlight display. You may let me. The display style may be changed so that a part of the text image is faded in or faded out according to the situation in which the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses. A part of the text image to be displayed in a display style different from other parts is changed according to the elapsed time in arbitrary production execution, not limited to the situation where the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part to be displayed in a display style different from the other parts is changed according to the progress of the effect, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component, the display mode of the text image as the second component, the elapsed time, etc. One of the display control that can be changed according to the display and the display control that can be displayed by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images is executed. And the other may not be executed. As the first component and the second component related to the text image, any component may be changed with respect to the display content and display mode of the text image, for example. It is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image in place of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image. You may. For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying a text image in an enlarged or reduced manner, and these enlargement and reduction ratios according to the elapsed time. It suffices if any component that can be set with respect to the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio and the reduction ratio and the amount of change, can be changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the one that changes the display mode of the text image is the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 19-6 (A). It is not limited to those that change the display color, and any display style, display layout, and other display modes may be changed. For example, in the corresponding text display period, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is replaced with the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image, the origin coordinates, the font family, and the like. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, and a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be capable of changing the display mode different from the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. ..

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters such as cursive and cursive is multiplexed or compressed and encoded as a part of the moving image data, and the video data separated from the moving image data is decompressed. A text image of a specific aspect may be displayed by decoding or the like. In this case, the data relating to the text image of the specific aspect is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. As described above, the data related to the text image includes the specific text image-related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11 and the normal text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. You may.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table is composed of field data corresponding to a part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using the font data. , The corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, since the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data related to the text display setting, for example, textSize.

As the scalable font data such as the outline font data and the vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13, only the data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared, for example, general-purpose Japan. Data corresponding to a text image, such as word font data, which is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when the amount of the text image used in the display effect is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused. It is possible to reduce the burden, and it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As the second component related to the text image, the specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at a plurality of timings is not limited to the text image showing the line "super hot". , Any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group may be used. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying the lyrics of a musical piece or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as a specific text image. In this way, a plurality of second components such as a display mode are provided for a specific text image corresponding to a sound effect or a display effect in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as a reproduction output of a musical piece or a reproduction display of a moving image. It may be changeable at the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. May be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, the text image of the display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is not limited to the text image of the display content suggesting that the ratio of "big hit" is high, and suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. May be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10").

The glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold", for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any color different from metallic colors. It may include the case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be set so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed. Just do it.

When the text image is displayed in rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in characters and the display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a different display color can be changed for each in-character coordinate of the text image. , Rainbow display should be possible. For example, in the in-character coordinates of 1, the display color is changed from red to orange, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue-purple to magenta, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be changed in sequence. At this time, in consideration of the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted for each. The display color in the in-character coordinates may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and magenta. After reddish purple, it is sufficient to return to red and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in the display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of the intra-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. Good. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display. The display of the text image may be displayed as a rainbow as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates within the characters of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing the common display color for all the in-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the in-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed to different components depending on whether or not the player's specific motion is detected, or a plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. It may be changed to either. The player's specific operation that makes it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A which is a V controller, and other operations of the V stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary operation of tilting the rod, or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. The movement of the player is not limited to what can be detected, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically change the state of the detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video type motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

In the effect of displaying a text image using text image data, a part or all of the effect may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=). 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (=). 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (= 90%). According to the setting of such a determination ratio, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect of displaying the text image according to any of the text display process patterns 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is executed. Is different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect of displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed. The ratio of image display effects is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" and the effect by displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectation is high, which is a setting value.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range in which the special conditions are satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. In addition, any effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a moving image effect for displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, a moving image effect executing means such as an effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing moving image data such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a first storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. The display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the two storage areas and the first storage area. For example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144 and the storage data of the second storage area are used. A character image control means for controlling the display of a character image, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is, for example, a text image designated by text image designation information. The character image control means is added to one moving image, including data on a plurality of character image components including one component and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, for example. During the display period of the character image, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-7. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 19-8, for example, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. May be good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 19-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 19-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the in-character coordinates and the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a moving image effect for displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, a moving image effect executing means such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing moving image data such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a first storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. Using the storage data of the second storage area and controlling the display of the moving image using the storage data of the two storage areas and the first storage area, for example, a moving image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144. A character image control means for controlling the display of a character image, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is, for example, a text image designated by text image designation information. The character image control means includes, for example, moving image data 91AKD01, which includes data relating to a plurality of character image components including one component and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. For the first moving image such as a moving image and the second moving image such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, which is different from the first moving image, for example, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 were applied. It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image such as a text image. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 19-8, for example, when the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1, the character image is displayed. The second component with respect to may be modifiable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 19-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 19-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the in-character coordinates and the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of feature parts)
The configurations relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the feature portion 60AK and the like. For example, the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and the first component is in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component may be changed, and a character image using data related to a common character image is used for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image. It may be additionally displayable.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit 91AK100… Microprocessor 91AK131 for effect control… CPU
91AK132 ... VDP
91AK143 ... Video decoder 91AK144 ... Video renderer 91AK146 ... Text image renderer 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11-91AKM14 ... Storage area

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means is
In the first situation, a change effect that changes the display mode of the predetermined display, and
A special effect of notifying the first content which is advantageous for the player in response to the display mode of the predetermined display becoming a specific mode, and
In a second situation different from the first situation, a predetermined effect of changing the display mode of the specific display different from the predetermined display to notify the second content which is advantageous for the player different from the first content. When,
Is feasible and
When the change effect is executed and when the predetermined effect is executed, a specific effect having at least a part of the effect modes is executed.
further,
A moving image effect executing means that can execute a moving image effect that displays a moving image to which a character image is added,
A first storage area for storing data related to moving images,
A second storage area for storing data related to character images,
A moving image control means for controlling the display of a moving image using the data in the first storage area, and
A character image control means for controlling the display of a character image using the data in the second storage area is provided.
The data in the second storage area includes data relating to a first component and a plurality of character image components including the second component.
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to the moving image.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images